Week 15 : - Tải miễn phí tài liệu, ebook, văn bản mẫu, mẫu...

Gi¸o ¸n tiÕng Anh 7 - N¨m häc 2014 – 2015.

Period 1

Review

I. Objective:

After the lesson, students will review the main contents of the lessons which are learned in class 6: The simple present tense, the present continuous tense, near future, wh- questions, comparative and superlative of short adjectives.

II. Content:

1. The tenses of verbs

a. The present simple tense.

* Tobe: am, is, are

(+) I am = I’m (-) I am not = I’m not (?) Am I…….?

We We We

You are You are not Are You ………?

They They They

He He He

She is She is not Is She ……….?

It It It

* Ordinary verbs :

(+) I (-) I

We + V( without To ) We + Don’t + V

You You

They They

He He

She + Vs(es) She + Doesn’t +V

It It

TrÇn ThÞ Thu HiÒn Trêng THCS Qu¶ng Liªn

1


(?) I He

We Does She + V ?

Do You + V ? It

They

b. The present continuos tense:

(+) S + am / is / are + Ving .

(-) S + am / is / are + not + Ving.

(?) Am / is / are + S + Ving ?

c. Near future :

(+) S + am / is / are + going to + V.

(-) S + am / is / are + not + going to + V.

(?) Am / is / are + S + going to + V ?

III. Practice :

Ask Ss to do exercises , then the teacher corrects them .

Exercise 1: Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets.

1. My brother ( do ) ………………….his homework in his room now, He ( do ) ……………….it everyday.

2. They ( visit ) ……………………..us next week .

3. It usually ( rain )…………………… in the rainy season.

4. I ( not go ) ……………………….to school on Sunday .

5. Listen! I think the telephone ( ring ) ………………………….

V. Homework : Review and prepare unit one (A1,3,4,5)

********************************************************


2


Lesson : 2

UNIT ONE : BACK TO SCHOOL Period: 1 A- Friends ( 1,4,5:)

I. Objective : After the lesson, students will review the greetings and introduce themselves . They will practice 4 skills : Listening, speaking, reading and writing.II. Language content: 1. Vocabulary: - Nice to meet you . – Just fine/ not bad - How is everything? - Pretty good./ so am I. 2. Grammar: The present simple tense.III. Teaching method: Eliciting, pairwork, groupwork, ask and answer .IV. Teaching aids : Textbook, tape, cassette.V. Procedure :

T’activities Ss’ activities1. Warm up :- Greetings.- Have Ss play a game called slap the board.T reads the questions => Ss slap the answers.

- Greetings.- 2 groups play game.- Listen.


3

Goodbye

Yes, I am

Very well, thanks


a. What’s your name?b. How are you today?c. What class are you in?d. Goodbye.e. Are you a new student?

- Demonstrate the group which wins the game.

2. New activities :a) Listen. Then practice with a partner.- Introduce some situations:+ Nice to see/ meet you.+ Nice to see / meet you again.+ So am I.- Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape.- Ask Ss to read in pairs.- Call on some pairs to roleplay the dialogue in front of the class.- Correct the mistake.- Ask Ss to look at the asnwers then work in pairs.- Call on some pairs to ask and asnwer the questions in front of the class.- Correct then give the correct answers.b) Listen. Then practice with a partner.- Ask Ss to look at the picture in part 3 and introduce the picture.

- Listen and write down.

- Read in chorus and individually.

- Look at the books and listen to the tape.- Work in pairs.- Practice in front of the class.- Work in pairs.- Practice in front of the class.- Write down.- Look at the picture and listen.

- Work in pairs.- Practice in front of the class.

- Complete the dialogues.- Listen and write down.


4

Class 7A

My name is Hoa


- Have Ss work in pairs.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Correct their pronunciation.c) Listen. Complete the dialogues.- Ask Ss to complete the dialogues in part 4 - Explain some new phrases:+ How is everything?+ Just fine.+ Pretty good.- Have Ss complete the dialogues.

- Ask Ss to exchange the results with their partners.- Call on some Ss to give their answers in front of the class.- Correct and give the correct answers.a.+ How are you? + Pretty good. + How about you ? + Not bad. + Me too.b. + How is everything? + Ok. How are you today? +Just fine. + So am I.- Have Ss roleplay the completed dialogues in pairs.- Call on some pairs to read the dialogues in front of the class.- Correct their pronunciation. d) Ask Ss to look at 4 pictures in part 5.

- Complete the dialogues individually.- Exchange the result with the partner.- Give the answers.

- Copy down.

- Work in pairs.

- Practice in front of the class.

- Answer the questions.-

- Listen to the tape and write the order of the pictures .- Listen to the tape .- Give the answers .- Listen again and check the


5


- Ask Ss about the people in these pictures . Who are they? What are they doing ?- Ask Ss to listen to the tape then write the letters of the dialogues in the order they hear .- Play the tape for Ss.- Call on some Ss to give the answers .- Play the tape again and ask them to check their answers .- Correct and give correct answers .1-C 2-B 3- D 4-A- Ask Ss to base on the picture and make the dialogues.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Correct the mistakes if necessary.3. Consolidation:- Have Ss work in pairs making a dialogue.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Remark.4. Homework:- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each word.- Complete the dialogue in part 4 in exercise book. Do exercise 1,2 in workbook.- Prepare part A2,3.

answers

- Copy down.

- Make dialogues in pairs.



- Write homework.


6


**************************************************

Lesson 3UNIT ONE : BACK TO SCHOOL

Period 2 : A- Friends ( A2- 3)I. Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the information about Hoa and practice reading skill.II. Language content: 1. Vocabulary : - To be different from… - Unhappy >< happy - To miss 2. Grammar: Review : - The present simple tense. - Comparison.III. Teaching method: Eliciting, using pictures, pairwork, groupwork.IV. Teaching aids : Textbook, cassette, tape, pictures.V. Procedure:


7


Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities


8


1. Warm up :- Greetings.- Have Ss play a game.

Keywords: School, old, big, happy, uncle, new, friend, live, student, parent.- Demonstrate the group which wins the game.2. Pre- reading:- Introduce the situation, then explain some new words:+ Different ( adj) : ( give 2 things in order to compare )+ Unhappy (adj) >< happy+ To miss (v) : (give a situation)- Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually.* Check new words by playing a game: rub out and remember.- Have Ss do an exercise in groups : Ordering statements.a. Hoa’s school in Hue is small.

- Greetings.- Play a game in 2 groups.

2 groups take part in the game to find out the words which have been learnt.

- Clap hands.


- Guess the meanings.

- Read new words in chorus and individually.- Play a game.

- Work in groups.


9

S C H O O L DT T B I G H N U N C L E A ED U J I T P I


b. Hoa is a new student in class 7A.c. Hoa’s new school is bigger than her old school.d. Hoa is from Hue.e. Now she lives in Hanoi.- Call on some groups to give their predictions in front of the class.3. While- reading:- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape, then correct their predictions. - Ask Ss to check the result with their partner.- Correct and give the correct answer: 1.b 2.d 3.e 4.a 5.c- Have Ss read the text in silent. - Call on some Ss to read the text aloud.- Ask Ss to read the questions and the text again, then work in pairs.- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class.- Correct and give the correct answers.a. She is from Hue.b. She is staying with her uncle and aunt.c. No, she doesn’t.d. Her new school is bigger than her old school.e. She is unhappy because she misses her parents and her friends.4.Post-reading:- Have Ss play a game : Guessing game.( each student writes a sentence in the text )

- Give the predictions.

- Listen and correct the predictions.

- Check the result.- Copy down.

- Read in silent.- Read aloud.- Work in pairs.


- Write down.

- Play a game.

- Write homework.


10


5. Homework:- Learn by heart part 2 and write the answers in the exercise book.- Do exercise 3,4 in work book.- Prepare B1,2,3.

Lesson 4

UNIT ONE : BACK TO SCHOOL Period 3 B- Names and addresses.( B1,2,3)I. Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about personal information such as: name, age, address…II. Language content:1. Vocabulary: - Family name (n) - Middle name (n ) - Address (n)2. Grammar. - The simple present tense. - Structure: What’s your family name? What’s your middle name?III. Teaching method: Explanation, asking and answering, pairwork, groupwork.IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, casstte, sub-board.V. Procedure:

Teacher’s Activities Students’Activities1. Warm up:- Greetings. - Greetings.


11

You 54 Quang Trung Hoa 13 Street

Her mother You father Le loi Linh 40 street


- Have Ss play a game called: Noughts and Crosses .

- Have Ss ask and answer about the information in the grids.- Remark and demonstrate the group which wins the game.2. New activities:a) Listen. Then practice with a partner.- Introduce the situation of the dialogue, then explain some new words.+ Family name (n) : ( the first name )+ Middle name (n) : + Address (n) : ( where you live)- Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually.- Correct their pronunciation.- Ask Ss to look at their books and listen to

- Play a game in 2 groups.

Ask and answer the questions.

EX: S1: How old are you? S2: I’m 13

- Listen and write.


- Read new words in chorus and individually.

- Listen to the tape.

- Work in pairs.- Practie in front of the class.


12


the tape .- Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue.- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class.- Correct their pronunciation.- Ask Ss to look at the questions then work in pairs : one asks and one asnwers.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers:a. She is talking to Mrs Lien.b. Her family name is Pham.c. Her middle name is Thi.d. She lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao street.- Give some cues then ask Ss to practice in pairs.+ Nam – Nguyen – 15 – 32 Nguyen Du street.+ Hoa – Pham – 12 – THD street.+ Minh – Tran – 13 – Da Nang.+ Thuy – Bui – 14 – LHP street.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Correct the mistakes if necessary.b) Write . Complete this dialogue.- Introduce the situation of part 2.- Ask Ss to complete the dialogue .- Ask them to exchange the result with their partner.- Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class.- Correct and give the correct answers:

- Work in pairs.

- Practice asking and answering in front of the class.- Copy down.

- Practice in pairs using the cues.


- Listen.- Complete the dialogue.- Exchange the result with the partner.- Give the answers.

- Copy down.

- Practice reading the dialogue.


13


Who- Who – What/which – Where – Where – How.- Call on some pairs to read the completed dialogue aloud.- Correct their pronunciation.3. Consolidation:- Have Ss ask the partner questions then complete the form.- Ask Ss to give the questions for the information.- Make model with a student:EX: What’s your name? How old are you? Which grade are you in? What’s your school’s name? or Which school do you study at? Where do you live?- Have Ss work in pairs.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Remark.4. Homework:- Complete the form in the exercisebook.- Do exercise 1,2 at page 5,6 in workbook.- Prepare part B4,5.

- Ask the partner and complete the form.- Give the questions.- A student answer the teacher’questions.


- Write homework.


Period 4 : B – Names and addresses (B4,5)I. Objective:


14


By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to ask and answer about distances. Practice listening, speaking, reading and writing skills.II. Language content: Structure : How far is it from ………to ……….? It’s about ……….III. Teach method: Eliciting, using pictures, pairwork and groupwork.IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, cassette, tape, pictures.V. Procedure:

Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities1. Warm up:- Greetings.- Have Ss play a game : Wordsquare

- Ask Ss to find out the words in order to ask and prepositions.-Have Ss play in 2 groups.- Remark and demonstrate the group which wins the game.2. New activities:a) Listen. Then practice with a partner.- Ask Ss some questions such as:+ Where do you live?+ How do you go to school?=> Then lead in new structure:


Where, who, what, why, how, when.on, at, by, from, to.

- Answer T’s questions.


15

W W W H Y H W H E N E B A O N


+ How far is it from your house to school?=> It’s about one kilometer.- Have Ss makesentences with new structure.- Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape.- Ask them to read the dialogue in pairs.- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class.- Correct their pronunciation.- Ask Ss some questions:+ Where does Hoa live?+ Is it far from school?+ How does she get there?b) Ask and answer with a partner.- Have Ss look at 4 pictures in part 5.- Ask them to practice in pairs asking and answering about distances .EX: How far is it from your house to the market? It’s about one kilometer.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Correct the mistakes if necessary.3. Consolidation:- Give some given cues then ask Ss to practice in pairs.+ Market / 2 km+ Post office / 700 meters+ School / 1 km+ Bus stop / 5oo meters- Call on some pairs to practice in front of


- Make sentences .- Look at the book and listen to the tape.- Work in pairs.- Practice in front the class.


- Look at 4 pictures in the book.- Practice in pairs .


- Work in pairs.


16


the class.- Have Ss make a dialogue based on the dialogue between Nam and Hoa.- Call on some pairs to practice.4. Homework:- Write part 5 in the exercisebook.- Do exercise4,5 at page 6,7 in workbook.- Prepare part B6,7.


- Make a dialogue.


- Write homework.


Period 5 : B – Names and addresses ( B 6,7)I. Objective: The students will continue to practice asking and answering about distances. Practice listening and speaking skills.II. Language content: Review the structure : How far is it from…….to ……..? It’s about ………….III. Teaching method: Eliciting, using pictures, pairwork.IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures.V. Procedure:

Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities1. Warm up :- Greetings.- Ask Ss some questions about themselves.EX: What’s your name?

- Greetings.- Answer T’s questions.


17


How old are you?Where do you live?How far is it from your house to school?How do you go to school?- Remark and give marks.2. New activities:a) Listen and write.How far is it ? Write the four distances.- Introduce the situation of the lesson.- Ask Ss to look at the picture in part 6.- Have Ss call the names of the places.- Ask Ss some questions such as:+ Is Lan’s house near or far from school?+ Is Lan’s house near the market/ the post office/ the theater?- Ask Ss to listen to the tapethen find out the distance between the places.- play the tape for Ss 2 times.- Have Ss exchange the result with the partner.- Call on some Ss to give the results in front of the class.- Play the tape again for Ss to check their answers.- Correct and give the correct answers:a. School to Lan’s house : 300mb. Lan’s house to the post offfice : 700mc. School to the movie theater : 3kmd. Movie theater to the post office : 2km- Have Ss practice asking and answering the distance between the places.- Correct the mistake.

- Write new lesson.

- Listen.- Look at the picture.- Call the names of the places.- Answer T’s questions.

- Listen to the tape.

- Find out 4 distances.- Exchange the results with the partners.- Give the results.- Listen to the tape and check.

- Practice asking and answering

- Look at the form in part 7.


18


b) A survey:- Ask Ss to look at the form in part 7.- Introduce the aim of this part: Ask their classmates some information then fill in the form.- Have Ss give the questions for the information.- Make model with a student:+ What’s your name?+ Where do you live?+ How do you go to school?+ How far is it from your house to school?- Have Ss work in pairs.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.3. Consolidation;- Ask Ss to base on the information and write a short passage about their partner.EX: My friend is……..He/She lives at……….. He/ She goes to school by………It’s about……..from……….to……..- Call on one student to go to the board and write, some Ss read aloud.- Correct the mistakes if necessary.* Remember:- Ask Ss to look at the remember and practice in pairs, using the questions in the box.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Correct if necessary.4. Homework:- Write part 6 in the exercisebook.

- Listen.

- Give the questions for the information.- Answer T’s questions.


- Write a short passage.

- Write on the board and read aloud.

- Work in pairs.


- Write homework.


19


- Make questions and answers in part remember.- Prepare unit 2- A1,2,3.

Lesson: 7Preparing day: .9.2014Teaching day: .9.2014

UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION Period 1: TELEPHONENUMBERS (A1, 2, 3)I. Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask for and give telephone numbers and further practice in addresses. They continue to practice 4 skills.II. Language content: - Telephone directory. - To call somebody. - What’s your telephone number?III. Teachng method: Explanation, asking and answering, pairwork.IV. Teaching aids: Textbook , tape , cassette.V. Procedure:

Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities1. Warm up :- greetings.- Ask Ss some questions :+ Where do you live?+ Does your home have a telephone?……..



20


=> Lead in new lesson.2. Presentation:- Introduce: Nowadays telephone has been very popular in our social communication. In this lesson we’ll deal with this matter.- Explain some new words:+ Telephone directory( n):+ To call ( somebody) :- Ask Ss to look at part 3 and listen to the tape.- Explain the model:+ What’s your telephone number? 8 262 019+ What’ her telephone number?- Have ss read the dialogue in pairs.- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class.- Correct their pronunciation.3. practice :- Ask Ss to read the telephone numberin the telephone directoryin part 1 => explain the way of reading.- Call on some Ss to read the telephone numbers aloud.- Ask them to practice asking and answering about the telephone number in the telephone directory.- Make model:What’s TanA’s telephone number?8 211 800- Have Ss work in pairs.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the

- Listen.

- Write down.Read new words.

- Look at the book and listen to the tape.- Listen and write.

- Read in pairs.- Practice in front of the class.

- Read the telephone numbers.

- Read aloud.

- Practice asking and answering.

- Listen.



21


class.- Correct the mistakes if necessary.- Ask Ss to listen some people’s telephone numbers , then write the numbers they hear.- Play the tape for Ss 2 times.- Ask them to exchange the results with the partners.- Call on some Ss give the answers.- Play the tape again and ask Ss to check the answers.- Correct and give the correct answers:a. 8 251 654 d. 8 352 793b. 8 250 514 e. 8 237 041c. 8 521 936 f. 8 821 6524. Production:- Ask Ss to have a survey.Name Address Telephone number- Have Ss work in pairs asking about the information given, using these questions:+ What’s your name?+ Where do you live?+ What’s your telephone number?- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Correct the mistake.5. Homework:- Write the questions and answers about telephone numbers of the people in part 1 ( 6 )- Prepare part A4,5 .

- Listen and write.

- Exchange the results with the partners.- Give the answers.- Listen to the tape and check.

- Write down.

- Take a survey.

- Work in pairs.

- Practice in pairs in front of the class.

- Write homework.


22


Lesson: 8

UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION Period 2 : A – Telephone numbers (A4,5)I. The aims: After the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about sure events in the future by using“ Will” positive statements and “ Wh” questions.II. Language content: - To meet ( v ) - Free ( adj ) - To see a movie - Would you like to? - Where will we meet? - Let’s meet at……. - Don’t be late. * Future tense: S + will + V . S + will not + V Will + S + V?III. Technique: Explanation, pairwork , gropwork.IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassette, sub-board.V. Procudure:

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up :- Greetings.- Have Ss play a game; Jumbled wordsESE; TRAST ; VOMEI ; REHATTEROMTOROW : TALE

- Greetings.- Play a game


23


- Call on some Ss to go to the board and write.- Remark and give marks.2. Presentation:- Have Ss look at the picture and ask them to guess the talk.- Introduce some new words and structures:+ Would you like to + V ?Would you like to see a movie?+ Where will we meet?+ Let’s meet at 6:45+ Don’t be late.* Future tense:(+) S + Will + V .(-) S + will not + V .(?) Will + S + V ?EX: She will go to Hanoi tomorrow.I will not play soccer this afternoon.Will you buy a new book ?- Ask Ss to make sentences based on the models.3. Practice- Play the tape for Ss.- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs.- Call on some pairs to roleplay the dialogue in front of the class.- Correct the pronunciation.- Ask Ss to look at the questions then work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class.- Correct the mistakes and give the correct

- Go to the board and write.

- Look at the picture and guess.

- Listen and write.

- Make sentences.

- Listen to the tape.- Work in pairs.- Practice in front of the class.

- Work in pairs.

- Ask and answer in front of the class.- Write down.


24


answers:a. Phong and Tam will.b. They will see a movie.c. They will meet at 6:45d. They will meet in front of the movie theater.- Give some cues then ask Ss to practice.+ Where / meet / on the street.+ What time/ meet / 7:00+ What / see / a movie.+ How / go / bike.EX: Where will we meet?We’ll meet on the street.- Have Ss work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Correct the mistake.4. Further practice:* Listen, then write the answers.- Introduce the aim of the lesson for Ss .- Ask them to listen to the tape carefully and find out the information to complete the table.- Play the tape for Ss 2 times.- Have Ss exchange the result with the partner.- Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class.- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and check the answers.- Correct and give the correct answers:a. 8 545 545


- Listen carefully.- Listen and complete the table.

- Listen to the tape.- Exchange the result with the partner.- Give the answers.- Listen again to check the answer.- Listen and write.

- Write a passage.


25


b. a moviec. Lan’s housed. Bus- Ask Ss to base on the information in the box to write a short passage.- Call on one student to go to the board and write , some Ss read the passage aloud.- Correct.5. Homework.- Learn by heart new structures by making 5 sentences with each.- Do exercise 1,2 at page 8 in workbook.- Prepare A6,7.

- Go to the board and write.- Read aloud.

- Write homework.

Lesson: 9UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION

Period 3 A – Telephone numbers (A6,7)I. Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice and use the simple future tense with Will , Wh- questions and answer fluently.II. Language content:1. Vocabulary : - Who’s calling? - To be out - Can I speak to….? To be back. - I’ll call again.2. Grammar:III. Teaching method:


26


The simple future tense. Eliciting, pairwork, groupwork.IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape. cassette.V. Procedure:

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up :- Greetings.- Ask Ss some questions and ask them to make a dialogue.- Call on 2 pairs to make dialogues aloud.- Remark and give mark.2. Presentation:- Explain some structures when talking on the phone.+ Who’s calling?+ Can/ Could I speak to ……..? + I’ll call again.+ To be out + To be back.EX: Can I seak to Lan? She is out .- Ask Ss to make sentences.- Correct the mistakes.3. Practice :- Ask Ss to look at the dialogue and read in pairs.- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class.- Correct their pronunciation.- Have Ss read the dialogue again then find



- Listen and write.

Read in chorus and individually.

- Make sentences.

- Work in pairs.- Practice reading in front of the class.

- Read the dialogue again and find the answers.


27


out the answers for the questions.- Have Ss work in pairs.- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class.- Correct the mistake and give the correct answers:a. Phong is.b. Han is.c. About Lan.d. At about 6 o’clock.e. After 6.- Use the tittle of A7 to set a scene and ask Ss to find the questions for the answers.a. At five thirty.b. We’ll eat cakes and sweets.c. Till seven or half past.d. We’ll meet in the street.- Ask Ss to listen to the tape then read after the tape.- Call on some Ss to read aloud.- Correct their pronunciation.4. Production:- Give a mapped dialogue. Tan NamWhat…….dotomorrow morning? go……..stadiumWhat……watch? A football match/ would …like…with me?Yes, when…..start? 4:30 / ……meet at 4:15Where ……meet? in front of …stadium.


- Copy down.

- Listen carefully and find the questions.

- Listen to the tape and read after the tape.- Read aloud.

- Look at the mapped dialogue.



28


ok.- Have Ss work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Correct the mistake.- Ask Ss to read the remember carefully.- Call on some Ss to read aloud.5. Homework:- Learn by heart new structures by making 3 sentences with each and learn by heart remember.- Do exercise 3,4,5 at page 9 in workbook.- Prepare part B1,2,3.

- Read the remember.

- Write homework.

.....................................................................................................................................

......................................Period: 10

UNIT 2: PERSONAL INFORMATION Lesson 4: B - My birthday ( B1,2,3,9)I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write and speak about ordinal numbers, months and the dates of the months fluently.II. Language content: 1. Vocabulary: - Dates of the months. - Ordinal numbers. 2. Grammar: Review: The simple future tense.III. Teaching method: Explanation, asking and answering.


29


IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassette, calendar.V. Procedure:Time

Teacher’s activities Student’s activities

1. Organization- Greets class- Asks everyday questions

- Greet teacher- Answer

2. Checking up- Asks Ss to do exercise B1 in workbook- Check student’s notebook- Comments. Marks

- Do the exercise- Open notebook- Remember

3. Pre- Listening* Picture drill

- Present new words

- Asks Ss to revise the future simple tense with “will”

- Look at the picture. Know the content of the lesson- Know the words. nervous(a): bån chån. worried(a): lol¾ng- Revise+ Positive : S + will+ Negative : S + won’t+ Question : Will + S

4. While- Listening- Plays the tape- Requires Ss to practice the dialogue- Asks Ss to answer the questions- Corrects.Gives key

- Asks questions f h

- Listen and repeat- Practice (Pair)- Answer (Pair)* Keya, Hoa is 13 years oldb, She will be 14 …c, Her birthday is on June 8th

d, She lives with her …e, Because she doesn’t have any


30


friends- Answer

5. Post- Listening- Requires Ss to read the dialogue .Then do exercise B5

- Gets Ss to write the form about themselves- Comments

- Read. Complete the form* KeyName : Pham Thi HoaDate of birth : June 8th

Address : 12 THD streetTelephone number : 8262019- Write. Read aloud- Listen

6. Homework- Asks Ss to do exercises B2,3 in workbook and prepare B6,7- Comments and says goodbye

- Remember

- Listen . Say goodbye

Period: 11

UNIT 2: PERSONAL INFORMATION Lesson 5B – My birthday (B4,5)I. Objective: After the lesson , Ss will be able to ask and answer about the date of birth fluently and they continue to practice the simple future tense.II. Language content:1. Vocabulary: - Nervous - To worry - Worried2. Grammar : The simple future tense. III. Teaching method:


31


Eliciting, pairwork, asking and answering.IV. Teaching aids : Textbook, pictures, sub- boardV. Procedure:

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up :- Greetings .-Have Ss play a game called Lucky numbers.1) What’s your family name?2) How old are you?3) LN4) What’s your address?5) What’s your telephone number?6) What’s your date of birth?7) LN8) Who do you live with?9) How old will you be on your next birthday?10) LN- Remark and lead in new lesson.2. New activitiesa) Listen. Then practice with a partner.- Ask Ss to look at the picture about Mr Tan and Hoa . Then Ask Ss to guess what Mr Tan is asking Hoa.- Call on some Ss to answer. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and give the information.

- Explain some new words:


- Listen.

- Look at the picture and guess.

- Answer.- Give the information:+ Name.+ Date of birth.+ Address+ Telephone number.


32


+ Nervous ( adj) :+ To worry(v) :+ Worried ( adj ) :- Have Ss read in chorus and individually.

- Check new words by playing What and where.- Play the tape for Ss to listen again.- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs.- Call on some pairs to read in front of the class.- Correct their pronunciation.- Ask Ss to look at the questions and work in pairs.- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of the class.- Call on one studnent to go to the board and write the answers.- Correct and ask Ss to copy down.* About you:- Ask a student some questions in part about you.- Have Ss work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.b) Read the dialogue again . then complete this form.- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and complete the form.- Ask Ss to exchange the result with the partner.

- Listen and copy .

- Read in chorus and individually.- Play a game.- Listen to the tape.- Work in pairs.- Practice reading in front of the class.- Work in pairs.- Practice in front of the class.

- Write the answers on the board.

- Copy down.

- Answer T’s questions.- Work in pairs.- Practice in front of the class.

- Read the dialogue again.- Complete the form.- Exchange the result with the partner.- Work in pairs.



33


- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about the information in the form.- Call on 2 Ss to ask and answer in front of the class.- Correct and ask Ss to complete the form in the notebooks.3. Consolidation:- Ask Ss to base on the information in the dialogue to make a dialogue.- Have Ss work in pairs.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Correct if necessary.4. Homework:- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each.- Do exercise 3,4 at page 11 in workbook.- Prepare part B6,7,8,9.

- Copy down.

- Make a dialogue.

- Work in pairs.Practice in front of the class.

- Write homework.

Period: 12

UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION Lesson 6 B – My birthday ( B6,7,8)I. Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write an invitation card for a birthday party. They will use the dates of the month fluently.II. Language content:


34


1. Vocabulary: - Birthday party. – To join - To invite - Fun - To finish - Invitation card2. Grammar: Review : The simple future tenseIII.Teaching method: Eliciting, pairwork, groupwork, using card.IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, pictures, cards.V. Procedure:

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up :- Greetings.- Have Ss play a game : Networks

Cakes

- Call on 2 Ss from 2 groups to go to the board and write .- Remark and lead in new lesson.2. New activities:a) Read. Then complete the card.- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer the questions:+ What is Lan doing?


Discuss in groups.


- Look at the pictures and answer .


35

Things to buy on birthday


+ What are they doing in the picture?- Explain some new words:+ Birthday party (n) :+ To invite (v) :+ Invitation card (n) :+ To finish (v) = to end+ To join (v) = to take part in+ fun (n) :- Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually.- Have Ss play a game : rub out and remember.- Ask Ss to read the text about Lan and find out the answers to the questions.+ How old is she now?+ Where does she live?+ When is her birthday?+ When will the party start and finish?- Call on some Ss to answer the questions.- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud.- Ask Ss to look at the invitation card of Lan and then complete it, using the information from the text.- Have Ss compare the result with the partner.- Call on some Ss to read the completed card aloud.- Correct the mistake and ask Ss to write in the notebooks.b) Think and write. Imagine you will be a guest at Lan’s birthday party.- Have Ss imagine they will be a guest at Lan’s birthday party. What will they do?- Have Ss work in groups of 4 or 5 discussing

- Listen and write .

- Guess the meanings .

- Read new words in chorus and individually.- Play a game.- Read the text and find the answers for the questions.

- Answer the questions.- Read the text aloud.- Complete the invitation card.

- Compare with the partner.- Read aloud.

- Imagine .

- Work in groups.


36


what they will bring to Lan’s birthday party.- Go around the class and hepl Ss if necessary.- Call on some representatives to demonstrate in front of the class.- Remark.c) Now write an invitation card to your birthday party.- Have Ss write an invitation to their birthday party based on part 6.- Ask Ss to exchange their writing with the partner.- Call on some Ss to read their invitation in front of the class.- Remark.d) Play with words.- Have Ss look at the book and listen to the tape.-Ask Ss to read after the tape.- Call on some Ss to read in front of the class.- Correct their pronunciation.3. Consolidation:- Ask Ss to look at the remember and repeat again.4. Homework:- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each. learn by heart part remember.- Do exercise 4,5 at page 12 in workbook.- Prepare part A 1,2 ( unit 3)

- Demonstrate in front of the class.

- Write an invitation.

- Exchange the writing with the partner.- Read aloud.

- Listen to the tape.- read after the tape.- Read aloud.

- Repeat.

- Write homework.


37


Period: 13

UNIT 3: AT HOME Lesson 1 A – What a lovely home (A1)I.Objective: After the lesson, Ss will be able to use the exclamations by giving compliments and complaints , they will learn about the things in the bathroom and the kitchen.II. Language content: 1. Vocabulary: - Awful - Washing machine - Sink - Dryer - Comfortable - Refrigerator - Tub - Dishwasher - Amazing - Electric stove - Convenient 2. Grammar: Structure: What + a/ an + adj + N! What + adj + Ns !III.Teaching method Explanation, pairwork, groupwork, using pictures.IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures.V. Procedure:

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up:- Greetings. - Greetings.


38Kitchen Living

room


- Have Ss play a game : Networks

- Call on 2 Ss to go to the board and write down.- Remark and give marks.2. New activities:a) Listen. Then practice with a partner.- Ask Ss some questions such as :+ how many rooms are there in your house?+ What are they?+ What is in each room?- Introduce the situation of the lesson, then explain some new words:+ Awful ( adj ) :+ Comfortable (adj) :+ Amazing (adj) : + Sink (n) :+ Tub (n) : + Washing machine (n ) : + Dryer (n) :+ Refrigerator (n) :+ Dish washer (n) :+ Electric stove (n) :+ Convenient (adj):- Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually.- Check new words by playing : rub out and remember.

- Play a game.



- Listen and write.

- Guess meanings.

- Read new words in chorus and individually.- Play a game.

- Listen to the tape and find the


39


- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape , then find out the things in the bathroom and the kitchen.- Call on some Ss to tell the things in the bathroom and the kitchen.- Remark.- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs.- Call on some pairs to practice reading in front of the class.- Correct their pronunciation.- Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the questions.- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class.- Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers:a) Living room, Hoa’s room, bathroom and kitchen.b) Because it is bright and it has nice colors.c) A sink, a tub and a shower.d) A washing machine, a dryer, a refrigerator, a dish washer, and an electric stove.- Have Ss copy down.- Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about themselves, using 2 questions in the book.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.b) Write exclamations:- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and find the exclamations.

things.

- Give the results.


- Work in pairs.


- Copy down.

- Work in pairs.


- Read the dialogue and find the exclamations.- Read aloud.- Listen and write.


40


- Call on some Ss to read aloud.- Introduce the exclamations to Ss.EX: What a hot day ! ( Today is very hot )What a boring film! ( The film is very boring.)

4. Homework :- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each .- Make 5 sentences with complaints and compliments.- Do exercies 1,2 at page 13 in workbook.- Prepare part A2.

- Write homework.

Period: 14

UNIT 3: AT HOME Lesson 2A – What a lovely home (A2)I.Objective: After the lesson, Ss will be able to use the exclamations by giving compliments and complaints, they will learn about the things in the bathroom and the kitchen.II. Language content: 1. Vocabulary: Expensive ( adj ) : wet (adj) : boring (adj) : bad ( adj) Amazing (adj) : lovely (adj) : delicious (adj ) :


41


interesting ( adj) : 2. Grammar: Structure: What + a/ an + adj + N! What + adj + Ns !III.Teaching method Explanation, pairwork, groupwork, using pictures.IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures.V. Procedure:

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up:- Greetings.- Have Ss play a game : Networks

- Call on 2 Ss to go to the board and write down.- Remark and give marks.2. New activities:- Introduce the situation of the lesson, then explain some new words:+ Expensive ( adj ) :+ wet (adj) :+ boring (adj) :+ bad ( adj)+ Amazing (adj) : + lovely (adj) : + delicious (adj ) :

- Greetings.- Play a game.


- Listen and write.

- Guess meanings.


42

Kitchen Living room


+ interesting ( adj) :- Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually.- Check new words by playing : rub out and remember.- Remark.- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs.- Call on some pairs to practice reading in front of the class.- Correct their pronunciation.b) Write exclamations:- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and find the exclamations.- Call on some Ss to read aloud.- Introduce the exclamations to Ss.EX: What a hot day ! ( Today is very hot )What a boring film! ( The film is very boring.)- Give some situations , then ask Ss to make exclamations.+ This boy is very lazy.+ The story is very interesting.+ The house is dark.- Have Ss give the structures.- Ask Ss to practice making exclamations using given cues in the book.- Call on some Ss to read their writing aloud .- Correct and ask them to write down.3. Consolidation:- Ask Ss to use the structures of exclamatioms to make sentences.



- Work in pairs.


- Make sentences.

- Write exclamations.

- Read aloud.- Write down.

- Make exclamations.


43


- Remark.4. Homework :- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each .- Make 5 sentences with complaints and compliments.- Do exercies 1,2 at page 13 in workbook.- Prepare part A3.

- Write homework.

Period: 15

UNIT 3: AT HOMEPeriod 3: B- Hoa’s family (B1,3 )

I. Objective By the end of the lesson, Ss will learn about jobs and job vocabulary. They will apply the in the life.II. Language content:1. Vocabulary: - Countrysise - Cattle - To grow - To raise - Till - Housework - To take care of - Journalist - To write for - Sick2. Grammar: Review : The simple present tense.III. Teaching method Explanation, using pictures, communicative.IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures.V. Procedure:


44


T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up:- Greetings.- Have Ss play a game : Wordsquare- Ask Ss to find out the words about the jobs.

- Remark and lead in new lesson.2. New lesson:a) Lis ten. Then pratice with a partner.- Ask Ss to look at the picture in the book.- Introduce the situation of the dialogue then ask Ss to guess what Hoa’s parents do.- Explain some new words.+ Countryside(n) :+ To grow (v) : + To raise (v) :+ Cattle (n) : + Till (adv) :+ Housework (n) :- Have Ss read new words in chorus and


- Find out the jobs.

- Listen.

- Look at the picture .- Listen and guess.

- Listen and write.




45

H T E A C H E R N S A L P W T S U D O C T O R CR A H M E R O A S M I C H K D M


individually.- Correct their pronunciation.- Play the tape for Ss 2 times.- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs.- Call on some pairs to practice reading in front of the class.* Now answer:- Have Ss work in pairs.- Have them play a game : Lucky numbers.1) What does Hoa’s father do?2) Where does he work?3) LN4) What is her mother’s job?5) What does her mother do everyday?6) LN7) Are they happy?8) How old is Hoa’s sister?- Remark.- Ask Ss to write down the answers in the notebooks.b) Read.- Ask Ss to look at 3 pictures in the book and guess what they do.- Call on some Ss to tell about their jobs.- Correct and give the correct answer, then introduce some new words:+ To take care of = To look after+ To write for (v)+ Journalist (n):+ Sick (adj) = ill- Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually.

- Listen to the tape.- Work in pairs.- Practice reading in front of the class.

- Work in pairs.- Play a game.

- Write the answers.

- Look at 3 pictures in the book.- Tell about the jobs.- Listen and write.

- Read new words .

- Play a game.- Read in silent.


46


- Ask them to play a game : Rub out and remember.- Have Ss read the text about Lan’s family in silent.- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud.- Correct the pronunciation.* Now practice with a partner.- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about Lan’s family.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Correct and give the correct answers:+ Her father is a doctor. He works in a hospital.+ Her mother is a teacher. She teaches in a primary school.+ Her brother is a journalist. He writes for a HN newspaper.- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about their family.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Remark.3. Consolidation:- Have Ss write a short passage about their family.- Ask them to exchange the writing with the partner.- Call on some Ss to read their writing in front of the class.4. Home work:- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each. – Prepare part B3,4

- Read aloud.

- Work in pairs.

- Practice in front of the class.- Listen and write.

- Work in pairs.

- Practice.

- Write a short passage.- Exchange the writing.- Read aloud.

- Write homework.


47


- Do exercise unit 3 in workbook

.....................................................................................................................................

........................Period: 16

Unit 3: At HomeLesson 4: B– Hoa’s Family (B2,4)

I. Objective After the lesson, Ss will know the work of each job, and listen to the tape in order to know the information then complete the forms.II. Language content: 1. Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about the jobs. 2. Grammar: Review : the present simple tense. Skill : Listening.III. Teaching method Eliciting, communicative.IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape , cassette, sub- board.V. Procedure:

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up:- Greetings.- Ask Ss some questions about their families, such as: What does your father do?Where does he work?What does your mother do?Do you have any brothers / sisters?How old is he/ she?……



48


- Remark and give mark.2. New activities.a) Match these half- sentences.- Exlpain the aim of the exercise and ask Ss to do.- Have Ss exchange the result with the partner.- Call on some Ss to read the completed sentences in front of the class.- Correct and give the correct answers:+ A farmer works on a farm.+ A doctor takes care of sick people.+ A journalist writes for a newspaper.+ A teacher teaches in a school.- Ask Ss to copy down.b) Listen, complete these forms for the three people on the tape.- Ask Ss to look at the form in the books.- Have Ss guess the information of three people. Open prediction

- Call on some groups to give their predictions.- Play the tape for Ss 2 times to check their prediction.- Ask Ss to fill in the forms.- Call on some Ss to give the results in front of the class.- Play the tape again for Ss to check.- Correct and give the correct answers:

- Ask Ss to use the inform mation about 3

- Write new lesson.

- Listen and do exercise.- Exchange the result with the partner.- Read completed sentences.- Listen and copy.

- Look at the forms.- Guess the information.

- Give the prediction.- Listen to the tape and check.

- Fill in the forms.

- Listen again and check.- Copy down.

- Work in pairs.


49

Name Age Job Place of work

Name Age Job Place of work

Tom 26 Teacher At a high school


people then ask and answer.- Make EX: + What is his name? => His name’s Tom.+ How old is he? => He is 26.+ What does he do?=> He’s a teacher.+ Where does he work?=> He works at a high school.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Correct the mistakes.3. Consolidation:- Have Ss write about 3 people in the forms.- Ask Ss to exchange the writings with the partners.- call on some Ss to read in front of the class.4. Homework:- Do exercise 3,4 at page 16,17 in workbook.- Prepare part B5,6

- Listen.


- Write about 3 people.- Exchange the writing.- Read aloud.

- Write homework.

.....................................................................................................................................

..............................Period: 17

UNIT 3 : AT HOMELesson 5: B – Hoa’s Family ( B5,6)

I. Objective By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use comparatives and superatives of irregular adjectives and long adjectives . They can use them fluently and apply in the life.II. Language content: 1. Vocabulary: - Apartment - Furnished


50


- Advice - Suitable - Empty - Good=> better => the best 2. Grammar: Structures: - S1 + tobe + more + adj + than + S2 - S + tobe + the most + adj.III. Teaching method Explanation, pairwork, using pictures, communicative.IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures.V. Procedure:

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up:- Greetings.- Have Ss play a game : Guess the jobs.+ You go to this person when you have a toothache.+ This person writes for a newspaper or magazine.+ Before a house is built , this person draws the plan for it.+ This person grows vegetables and raises cattle.….- Remark and give marks.2. New activities:a) Listen and read:- Introduce the content of the lesson to Ss .- Explain some new words:+ Apartment (n)= Flat .+ Advice (n) : + Empty (adj) >< Full+ Furnished ( adj) :

- Greetings.- Play a game:+ Dentist.

+ Journalist+ Architect

+ Farmer

- Write new lesson.

- Listen.- Listen and write.

- Guess the meanings .

- Read in chorus and individually.


51


+ Suitable (adj) : + Good => better=> the best Structures:+ Comparatives of long adjectivesS1 + tobe + more + adj + than + S2EX: She is more beautiful than her sister.+ Superlatives of long adjectives:S + tobe + the most + adj .EX: He is the most intelligent.- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape.- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs.- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class.- Correct their pronunciation.- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find the answers for the questions.- Have Ss work in pairs.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Correct and give the answer key:a. The one at number 27b. The one at number 79c. The one at number 79d. The one at number 27.The most suitable apartment is the smallest but it is the newest of the three apartments. It has two bedrooms, a large modern bathroom and a kitchen.b) Write.- Introduce the situation of the lesson.- Ask Ss to read the letter .

- Make sentences.

- Listen to the tape.- Work in pairs.- Practice reading .

- Find the answers .

- Work in pairs.- Practice asking and answering.

- Listen and copy.

- Listen.- Read the letter.- Complete the letter.

- Exchange the result with the


52


- Have Ss use the given words in the box in order to complete the letter.- Have Ss exchange the result with the partner.- Call on some Ss to read the completed letter aloud.- Correct and give the correct answer.- Ask Ss to copy the letter in the notebooks.3. Consolidation.- Ask Ss to look at the remember and read .- Call on some Ss to read aloud.- Have Ss make sentences with them.4. Homework:- Learn by heart new words and structures by making sentences with them.- Do exercises 2,3 at page 16,17 in workbook.- Prepare language focus 1.

partner.- Read the letter aloud.

- Copy the letter in the notebooks.- Read .

- Make sentences.

- Write homework.

Period: 18

Language focus 1I. Objective Ss do exercises in order to review the structures and grammar which they have been learnt from unit 1 to unit 3 . From that they will use them fluently and apply them in the life.II. Language content: - Present simple tense. - Future simple tense. - Ordinal numbers.


53


- Comparatives and superlatives. - Prepositions of place. - Occupations.III. Teaching method Eliciting, using pictures, pairwork, groupwork.IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, pictures, sub-board.V. Procedure:

T’s activities Ss’ activities1. Warm up:- Greetings. - Ask Ss some questions about their health, families.2. Consolidation and practice:(1) Present simple tense;- Ask Ss to repeat the use of the present simple tense.- Ask them to do exercise 1: Complete the passage using the verbs in brackets.- Have Ss exchange the result with the partner.- Call on some Ss to read aloud.- Correct and give the correct answers.(2) Future simple tense:- Have Ss play a game: Noughts and crosses


- Repeat aloud.

- Do exercise.

- Exchange the result with the partner.- Read aloud.

- Play a game.

Make sentences.


54

Go post office Call Ba Read book

Tidy yard See movie Watch TV


EX: He will go to the post office. He won’t call Ba.- Remark.(3) Ordinal numbers;- Ask Ss to write the correct ordinal numbers.- Call on 2 Ss to go to the board and write.- Correct if necessary.(4) Prepositions:- Have Ss look at the pictures in the book and use the prepositions in the box to write the positions of the cat.- Call on some Ss to speak aloud.- Correct and give the correct answers;a. It’s in front of the chair.c. It’s behind the TV.d. It’s next to the bookshelf.e. It’s on the couch.(5) Adjectives:- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and use the adjectives in the box to make sentences about comparatives and superlatives.- Call on some Ss to go to the board and write down.- Correct and give the correct answers:a) A is a cheap toy. B is cheaper. C is the cheapest.b) A is an expensive dress. B is more expensive.C is the most expensive.…….(6) Occupations:

- Write ordinal numbers.- Go to the board and write.

- Look at the pictures carefully and write.

- Speak aloud.- Copy.

- Make sentences.


- Copy down.

- Play a game in 2 groups.


55


- Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers.1. LN2. He fights fires. He is very brave. What is his job?3. She works in a school. She teaches students. what is her job?4. He lives in the countryside. He grows vegetables and raises cattle. What’s his job?5. LN. 6. She works in a hospital. She makes people well. What’s her job?7. He works in a factory. He repairs machines . What’s his job?8. LN(7) Is there a….?/ Are there any…?- Have Ss look at the picture then complete the sentences.- Have Ss work in pairs.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Correct if necessary.- Ask Ss to write in the notebooks.(8) Question words:- Ask Ss to look at the form then ask and answer the information about Pham Trung Hung.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Correct and ask them to write down.3. Further practice:- Give some cues then ask Ss to make sentences.

- Complete the sentences.


- Copy down.

- Work in pairs.


- Write.

- Do exercise.


56


+ Sydney / big / Australia.+ Tokyo / expensive / World.+ He / good student / class.4. Consoidation:5. Homework:- Do test yourself in workbook.- Review for the test.

- Write homework.

.....................................................................................................................................

...........................Period: 18

English written test 1

1. Objectives: Ss will be able to

*Vocabs: .

*Reading: Read a passage of 70 words about the persional information

*Writing: Write sentences one with the comparative and another with the superlative and put in order

to make sentences.

*Language focus: do multiple choice( the simple future,how far..,prepositions, the superlative)

2. Matrix:

TOPICS

Checking

contents

Identification Understanding Application Advanced

application

Total

MC WT MC WT MC WT MC WT

Personal

information

vocab 4-2 4-2

Simple present

future,

prepositions(LF),

4-1 2-0,75 6-1,75

-vocabulary

(Reading)

2-1

4-2 6-3


57


-simple future

(writing)

1-0,5 1-0,5

At home the

superlative(LF)

1-

0,25

1-0,25

the comparative

and the

superlative

1-0,5 2-1 3-1,5

Back to

school.

How far..,

Any, (LF)

3-

0,75

1-0,25 4-1

Total 10-3 11-5 2-1 2-1

25-10

Written Test 45 minutes . No 1

Name:

Class:

01

I/ Choose the words that have underline parts is pronunciated different from the others( 1p)

1. A. Mother B. birthday C. father D. weather

2.A. invite B. nice C. finish D. mice

3.A. amazing B. apartment C. calendar D. complain

4.A. pretty B. young C. yard D. yellow

II/ .Choose the best answers to complete the sentences .(2ps)

1. We will ……………our old friend next Sunday.

A. to meet B. meeting C. meet D . meets

2. Her birthday is ……………Friday, August 20th

A. at B. in C. on D. till

3. This dress is the …………..expensive of the four dresses

A. best B. most C. more D. the most


58


4. My father take care …………….sick children.

A. of B. about C. in D. about

5. Would you like …………the movie with me?

A. see B. to see C. seeing D. watch

6. Which is the most beautiful apartment? - ………..

A. The smallest one B. the smaller one C. a small one D. All are correct

7. ...........is it from your house to the market?

A. How often B.How long C.How old D. How far

8. Are there …… lamps on the wall?

A. any B.a C.an D. some

III. Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets. ( 2ps)

1. Mr Thinh is a doctor. Everyday he ( catch)……………...the bus to work.

2. We ( not play )…………………..soccer next Sunday.

3. Lan and Nam ( do)...................................their homework now.

4. We ( go )………………..to English class tomorrow

IV. Read the passage then answer the questions. ( 2ps)

I’m Lan .I’m thirteen years old. I live at 24 Nguyen Hue street with my parents and two sisters. My

telephone number is 8 278 710 . On my next birthday , July 5th , I will have a small party for my

birthday. I will invite some of my friends to my house. We will eat cakes and sweets and we will play

some games . The party will start at five and finish at nine.

1. Where does Lan live?

…………………………………………………………………………………………….

2. How many people are there in her family?

…………………………………………………………………………………………….

3. How long will the party last?

………………………………………………………………………………………………

4. What will they do at her birthday party?

.................................................................................................................................................

V. Put the words in the right order( xep từ theo đúng trật tự của nó) (2ps)

1.The party/ at/will/ house/ my/ start/at/ 6pm.

.................................................................................................................................................

2.The/ cheaper /blue dress/ red dress/ is / /the / than

................................................................................................................................................. TrÇn ThÞ Thu HiÒn Trêng THCS Qu¶ng Liªn

59


* Complete the sentences with the words provided (1p)

3. What/ be/ favorite/ subject/ school?

.................................................................................................................................................

4. School/ cafetiria / sell/ food/ students.

.................................................................................................................................................

02

I/ Choose the words that have underline parts is pronunciated different from the others( 1p)

1.A. young B. yard C. pretty D. yellow

2. A. Mother B. father C. weather D. birthday

3.A. complain B. apartment C. calendar D. amazing

4.A. invite B. nice C. mice D. finish

II/ .Choose the best answers to complete the sentences .(2ps)

1. ...........is it from your house to the market?

A. How long B.How far C.How old D. How often

2. This dress is the …………..expensive of the four dresses

A. best B. more C. the most D. most

3. My father take care …………….sick children.

A. about B.of C. in D. about

4. Are there …… lamps on the wall?

A. any B.a C.an D. some

5. Would you like …………the movie with me?

A. to see B. see C. seeing D. watch

6. We will ……………our old friend next Sunday.

A. meets B. meeting C. meet D . to meet

7. Her birthday is ……………Friday, August 20th

A. at B. on C. in D. till

8. Which is the most beautiful apartment? - ………..

A. The smallest one B. the smaller one C. a small one D. All are correct

III. Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets. ( 2ps)

1. Miss Lan is a doctor. Everyday she ( go)……………... to work by bus.

2. We ( not play )…………………..soccer next Sunday. TrÇn ThÞ Thu HiÒn Trêng THCS Qu¶ng Liªn

60


3. Nam ( do)...................................his homework now.

4. Nga ( go )………………..to English class tomorrow

IV. Read the passage then answer the questions. ( 2ps)

I’m Lan .I’m thirteen years old. I live at 24 Nguyen Hue street with my parents and two sisters. My

telephone number is 8 278 710 . On my next birthday , July 5th , I will have a small party for my

birthday. I will invite some of my friends to my house. We will eat cakes and sweets and we will play

some games . The party will start at five and finish at nine.

1. Where does Lan live?

…………………………………………………………………………………………….

2. How many people are there in her family?

…………………………………………………………………………………………….

3. How long will the party last?

………………………………………………………………………………………………

4. What will they do at her birthday party?

.................................................................................................................................................

V. Put the words in the right order( xep từ theo đúng trật tự của nó) (2ps)

1.The party/ at/will/ house/ my/ start/at/ 6pm.

.................................................................................................................................................

2.The/ cheaper /red hat/ brown hat / is / /the / than

.................................................................................................................................................

* Complete the sentences with the words provided (1p)

3. What/ be/ favorite/ subject/ school?

.................................................................................................................................................

4. School/ cafetiria / sell/ food/ students.

.................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................

...........................Period 20 CORECT THE WRITEN TEST

I. The aims: By the end of the lesson .ss will be able to assess their knowledge in order to improve their

gaps

II. Preparing: paper sheet

III/procedure: TrÇn ThÞ Thu HiÒn Trêng THCS Qu¶ng Liªn

61


STAGES CONTENTS NOTES

Activity1

10’

Activity2

8’

Activity3

12’

Activity4

12’

I/ Vocabs

01:

1.B 2.C 3.D 4. A

02:

1.C 2.DS 3.A 4. D

II/ Choose the best answers to complete the sentences .(2,5ps)

A: Each correct sentence gives 0,25.

01:

1.C 2.C 3.B 4. A 5. B 6. A 7. D 8. A

02:

1.B 2.D 3.B 4. A 5. A 6. C 7. B 8. A

*B/ Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets. ( 1pts)

0,5/one answer

01

1. catches

2.won’t play

3. are doing

4. will go

02

1. goes

2.won’t play

3. is doing

4. will go

III/ / Read the passage then answer the questions. ( 2,5ps)

IV0,5/one answer

1.She lives at …

2.There are 5 people

3. The party will last from five to nine.

4.They will play some games and eat cakes

V/ Put the words in the right order( xep t ừ theo đúng trật tự của

nó) ( 2 ps)

T:give answer

Ss: correct

T:call ss to give

answer

T:correct and give

mark

T:ask ss to give the

answers and correct

T: call each Ss to

give the answerand

correct


62


Homework

2’

01

1.The party will start at my house at 6pm.

2.The blue dress is cheaper than the red dress.

02

1.The party will start at my house at 6pm.

2.The red hat is cheaper than the brown hat.

Prepare unit 4 – A1,2,3

.....................................................................................................................................

.....................................Period: 21

UNIT 4: AT SCHOOLLesson 1: A – Schedules (A1,2,4)

I. The aims : The students will review the way of speaking the time and some subjects at school. Ss will practice listening for details about subjects and time.II. Language content: Review : - The simple present tense. - Vocabulary about subjects at school.III. Technique: Eliciting, pairwork, communicative.IV. Teaching aids : Textbook, tape, cassette, clock, sub- board.V. Procedure:

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up :


63 Math Geograph

yPhysics Music EnglishPhysical

educationHistory


- Greetings.- Have ss play a game : Slap the board

- Remark and demonstrate the group which wins the game.2. New activities:a) Listen and repeat:- Ask Ss to repeat the questions about asking the time.- Have Ss look at the clocks in the book.- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape.- Have Ss read after the tape.- Call on some Ss to read aloud.- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the time.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class ( exchange the roles)- remark.b) Answer about you.- Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about them.- Make model with a student:


- Write new lesson.

- Give the questions.

- Look at the clocks in the book.- Listen to the tape.- Read after the tape.- Read aloud.- Work in pairs.- Practice in front of the class.

- Work in pairs.

- Listen .


64


T: What time do you get up?S : I get up at 6 o’clock.T: What time do classes start?S : They start at 7 o’ clock.- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Remark and ask them to write the answers in the notebooks.c.Look at the pictures. Ask and answer questions- Ask Ss to look at 6 pictures carefully and call the names of these subject- Explain new word : Physical education (n)- Call on some students to speak about the pictures- Correc and give the correct answers+ Physics + music+ Geography + math+ English + Physical education- Have Ss look at the clocks and tell the time- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about these people- Make model with a studentT : What is lan studying ?S : She is studyng physicsT : What time does Lan/she have her physics class ?S : She has her physics class at 8:40- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class- Correct if necessary

- Practice in front of the class.- Write down.


- Answer the questions.

- Work in pairs.



65


- Ask Ss to write into the notebooks.3. Consolidation:- Repeat the way of speaking the times and subjects at school.4. Homework:- Doexercise 1,2 in workbook.- Prepare part 4,5.

- Speak aloud.

- Write homework.

VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

.....................................................................................................................................

...............Period: 22

UNIT 4: AT SCHOOLLesson 2: A – Schedules (A3,5)

I. The aims: By the end of the lesson, Ss can speak to each other about the schedule and practice the present continuous tense.II. Language content: - Review: + Vocabulary about subjects at school. + The present continuous tenseIII. Technique: Eliciting. mainly communicative, using pictures.IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, pictures, tape, cassette.V. Procedure:

Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities


66


1. Warm up:- Greetings.- Have Ss play a game: Networks

- Call on 2 Ss from 2 groups to go to the board and write down.- Remark.2. New activities:a) Listen and write. Complete the schedule.- Ask Ss to look at the schedule then explain the aim of the exercise.- Have Ss guess the missing subjects and time.- Call on some Ss to give their prediction.- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and compare their prediction.- Play the tape again and ask Ss to write the missing subjects and time.- Have Ss exchange the results with the partners.- Play the tape again for Ss to check the results.- Ask Ss to give the answers.- Correct and give the correct answer.- Ask Ss to copy down. Friday 7:00 7:50 8:40 9:40 10:30



- Listen.

- Guess.- Give the prediction.- Listen to the tape and check.

- Listen to the tape and write.

- Exchange the results.- Listen again and check.- Give the answer.- Listen and write.

- Look at the picture crafully


67

Subjects


English Georaphy Music Physics History

Saturday 1:00 2:40 3:40 4:30Physical education Math English Physics- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the time of the subjects on Friday and Saturday .EX: What time do they have English on Friday ?They have English at 7:00- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.- Correct the mistakes if necessaryb. Listen and read- Introduce the dialogue to Ss- Ask Ss some questions about their schedules- Ask Ss to guess what subjects Hoa and Thu have on Thursday- Call on some Ss to give the answers- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then check their guess- Call on some Ss to give the answers- Correct and give the correct answers:English , math , geography, physical education, music- Play the tape for Ss then explain the structure+ When do you have English ?I have English classes on Wednesday and Thursday + What is your favorite subject ?

- Speaks about the pictures

- Tell the time of each clock- Work in pairs

- Listen carefully

- Practice in front of the class

- Write down.

- Listen.- Answer the questions.- Guess.

- Give the answers.- Look at the books and listen to the tape.- Give the answers.

- Listen.


68


I like math- Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class- Correct their pronunciation- Ask Ss to answer some questions about the dialogue+ When does Thu have E classes ?+ What time do they start ?+ What orther classes does Thu have on Thursday ?+ What ‘s Thu’s favorite subject ? Why ?+ What ‘s Hoa’s favorite subject ? Why ?- Correct the mistakes if necessary- Have Ss write their scheducles in the notebooks- Introduce some more subject to Ss+ Civic education (n) : GDCD+ Fine arts (n) : MÜ thuËt+ Biology (n) : Sinh häc+ Chemistry (N) : Ho¸ häc+ Techmplogy (n) : C«ng nghÖ+ Elective subject : M«n tù chän- Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about their schedule- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class- Correct the mistakes3. Consolidation:- Repeat the subjects at school and structures:

- Write schedules in the notebook.

- Work in pairs.

- Practice speaking in front of the class.

- Listen carefully.

- Write homework.


69


When do we have……….?What is your favorite subject?4. Homework:- Learn by heart new words and structures.- Write the schdules in the exercise book.- Do exercise 3,4 at page 22& 23 in workbook.

VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Period: 23

Unit 4: At schoolLesson 3: A_Schedule (A6)

I. The aims :By the end of the lesson , the students will be able to speak about the

difference between two persons or two things. The students will know about the difference betweet schools in the USA and Viet Nam. Practice reading skillII. Language contnet :1. Vocabulary:

- Uniform (n) - A 20-minute break (n)- Cafeteria (n) - Snack (n)- Popular (adj) - After - school activity (n)

2. GrammarStructure : Tobe different form….


70


Reciew: the present simple tenseIII. Technique :

Brainstorming , Asking and answerning , groupwork.IV. Teaching aids :

Text book , tape , cassette , sub-boardV. Procedure : T’s activities Ss’activities1. Warm up - Greetings - Ask Ss some questions + How many classes do you have today ?+ What are they ?+ What ‘s your favorite subject ?+ When do you have English ?+ What time do they start ? Remark and give marks2. New activitesa.Read*Pre- reading :- Ask Ss some questions in order to load in new lesson :+ Which country has capital city as Washington DC ?+ What do you think about the USA? “Today we ‘ll learn about schools in the USA , before reading the text I ‘ll explain some new words for you”+ School uniform (n) : §ång phôc+ A_20_minute break : Giê gi¶i lao 20’+ Cafetesia (n) : Qu¸n ¨n tù phôc vô+ Snack (n) : Mãn ¨n nhÑ+ Popular (adj) >< unpopular

- Greetings. - Answer T’S questions I have….. They are….. I like….. I have…… They start at …

- Write new lesson

- Answer T’s question

- USA

< The students ca answer their opinions in V Namese>- Listen carefully- Guess the meanings- Read new words in churs and individually their copy down


71


+ After_school activity : Ho¹t ®éng sau giê häc* Checking technique: Rub out and remember- Have Ss do exercise : True or False ( in the text book )< using sub_board>- Ask Ss to guess the information- Call on some represintatives to give their predicitions in front of the class*While_reading :- Ask Ss to look at the text and listen to the tape their check their predictions- Call on some Ss to give their answers- Correct on give the correct answers a: T b : F c : F d : T e : F f : F- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud.Correct their pronuniation*Post-reading :- Ask Ss to discuss in groups about the difference between shools in the USA and school in Vnam- Call on some represontatives to demonstrate their ideas- Summarize the ideas of the groups- Remark b. Play with words - Play the tape for Ss - Explain some new words + Home economics + The word changes + Rivers and mountains ranges + Several

- Play a game

- Do exercise in groups

- Give the prediction

- Listen to the tape & check the prediction- Give the answers - Copy down

- Read the text aloud

- Work in groups

- Demonstrate their ideas

- Listen

- Listen to the tape

- Read in chours and individually, then aopy down


72


- Play the tape - Call on some Ss to read after the tape - Call on some Ss to read aloud 3. Consolidation - Repeat the details about the schools in the USA and VN- Repeat new words and structures4. Homework- Learn by heart new words & structure by making sentences with them - Make sentences with the part remember.- Do exercise 4 at page 23 in workbook - Prepare B1,2.

- Read after the tape

- Read loudly

- Listen and remember

- Write home work

VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Period: 24

Unit Four: At school Lesson 4: B- The library (1,2)

I. The aims :


73


By the end of the lesson , the students will read the text to understand the details and practice library vocabulary & prepositions of positionsII. Language content : 1. Vocabulary :

- Rack (n) - Shelf (n) Shelves- Science books (n) - Dictionary (n)- Chemistry (n) - Biology (n)- Literature in Viet names(n) - Reader(n)- Reference book (n) - Novel (n)- At the back of (pre)

2. Grammar : The structure : - Where can I find the math books, please? - Do you have newspapers and magazines here? Review : The present simple tense :

III. Technique :Explanation , pairwork and groupwork, using pictures.

IV. Teaching aidsText book , tape , cassette, pictures.

V. Procedure :

T’s activities Time Ss’activities1. Warm up :- Greetings- Have Ss play a game : Jumbled words Luratitere Hisplesc Torishy Bhygrageo Spenawpes- Have students work in groups- Call on 2 representatives to go to the board and write down- Correct & remark2. New activities:

6’

8’

- Greetings - Play a game

- Work in groups- 2 students go to the board & write


74


a. Listen and read:- Ask Ss to look at the picture and guess- Ask Ss some questions+ What is it in the picture ?+ Where do you usually see it ? Load in new lesson+ Does your school have the library ?+ What is the usefulness of library ?+ What do you usually do when you go to the library ?+ Who can help you find the books in the library ? Explain some new words :+ Rack (n): Gi¸, kÖ + Shelf (n) Shelves : Gi¸ s¸ch+ Science books : S¸ch khoa häc+ Dictionary (n) : tõ ®iÓn+ Novel : tiÓu thuyÕt+ Reference books : S¸ch tham kh¶o+ At the back of : phÝa ®»ng sau*Checking technique :- Ask Ss to play a game Slap the board< new words are written in the sub_road ) - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then do exercise :Grid : The libraryOpenning time :Books on the left:Books on the right:Books in the English:

10’

- Look at the picture carefully- Listen and answer

Yes, it does( Ss can answer the questions in Vnamese )

- Guess their meanings, read new words in chours and individually- Copy down in their notebooks

- Play game

- Look at the book and listen to the tape

- Complete the table


75


Closing time:- Call on some Ss to go to the board and complete the table- Correct and give the correct answer- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class- Correct their pronunciation- Ask Ss to look at the questions in the books then work in pairs- Call on some pairs to ask and answer the questions in front of the class- Correct the mistake if necessary

b.Listen then practice with a partner- Introduce new lesson- Play the tape for Ss and ask them to look at the books- Explain some structures :+ Where can I find the math books, please+ Do you have magazines here ? new spapers They are on the shelves on the left / right- Ask Ss to make questions and answers- Correct the mistakes if necessary- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class- Correct their pronunciation

8’

- Go to the board and write

- Work in pairs- Read aloud

- Work in pairs

- Ask and answer loud

a. Where are the magazinesThey are on the racksb. Where are the news spapersThey are on the racks………

- Listen to the teacher- Listen to the tape

- Listen and write down


76


- Ask Ss to look at part B1 again then make the similar dialogue- Have Ss work in pairs- Call on some pairs to make their dialogues in front of the class Ex :H : Good morningL : Good morning. Can I help you ?H : Yes , where can I find the books in English?L : They are at the back of the libraryH : Do you have math and biology books here?L : Yes, they have on the shelves on the leftH : Thank you very muchL : You are welcome.3. Consolidation:- Ask Ss to write sentences about their school library , using the library vocabulary- Call on some Ss to read their writing in front of the class- Remark4. Home work- Learn by heart new words by making sentences with them- Do exercise 1,2 at page 24 in work book- Prepare part 3,4,5

4’

1’

- Make questions & answers

- Work in pairs- Read the dialogue aloud

- Look at B1 again

- Work in pairs- Some pairs make dialogues

- Write about the school library

- Read loudly

- Write home work

VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….


77


……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Period: 25Unit 4 : At school

Lesson 5 : B- Thelibrary (3,4)I. The aims :

By the end of the lesson , the students will be able to know the information about one of the world’s largest libraries thoughe the text. They will review the prepositions of position and library vocabulary.II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary

- To receive (v) - To contain (v)- Employee (n) - Congress (n)

2. Grammar : - The present simple tense. - Skill : Listeing, reading.III. Technique :

Explaination , asking and answering , work in pairs and groupsIV. Teaching aids

Text book , player, speaker, sub- board,…

V. Procedure :

T’s activities Time Ss’ activities1. Warm up- Greetings- Have Ss play a game

6’- Greetings- Play a game


78


Noughts and CrossesScience books

Reference books

Newspapers

Magazines ReadersBiology books

Novels History books Dictionaries- Make example :S1 : Where are the science books ?S2 : They are on the sheklves on the right- Remark and lead in new lesson2. New activitiesa. Listen : Where are they ?- Ask Ss to look at the chart in the library- Have Ss work in groups guessing the positions of the books in the library.- Call on some representatives to speak about the pisitions of books- Play the tape for Ss and ask them ti check their predictions <2times>- Call on some Ss to give their answers in front of the class- Play the tape again and check the answer- Give the correct answer :

1. Study 2. Science + math3: Geography4 + 5 : Newspapers and magazines

6+7 : English 8, Librarian’s desk- Ask Ss to compare their predictions- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the positions of books

8’

10’

- Play game in 2 groups( Make questions and answers)

- Look at the chart carefully- Work in groups to discuss the posotions- Demonstrate their predictions- Listen to the tape

- Give the results

- Listen to the tape- Copy down

- Compare the predictions- Work in pairsS1 : Where are E books ?


79


- Correct the mistakes

b. Read then answer* Pre- reading- Introduce the lesson then explain some new words+ To reccive (v) : NhËn+ Comgress (n) : Quèc héi+ To contain (v) : bao gåm+ Employee (n) : nh©n viªnChecking technique : Rub out and remember - Ask Ss to do exerise : T or F prediction

1. The library of Congress is in New york2. It receives copies of all E books3. There are over 100 million books in this

library4. The shelves are about 300 km long.5. 5.000 people work in the library

- Ask some representatives to give their predictions*While-reading- Ask Ss to look at the text, read in silent then check their predictions- Call on some Ss to give the answer1 - F 2 - F 3 - T 4 – F 5 - T - Call on some students read the text in front of the class- Correct their pronunciations- Ask Ss to look at the text again then find out the answers for the question

8’

S2 : They are on the shelves behind the librarian’s desk- Listen carefully

- Listen and copy down

- Guess meanings read new words in chours and individually

- Work in groups to predict

- Give the predictions

- Read the text in silent and check the predictions- Give the answers



80


- Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers < The questions in the book >1 – d2 - Ln3 – e4 – b5 – LN6 – a7 – c- Ask Ss to write the answers in their notebooks* Post_reading- Ask Ss to compare their school library with the library of Conguss- Ask them to write the sentencesEx : My school library in smaller than the library of Congress<5> Play with words :- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the teacher- Ask Ss to read after the teacher - Explain some new words :+ To forget (v) :+ Rocket (n) :+ Space (n) : + Adveture (n) :- Call on some Ss to read the poem aloud- Correct their pronunciation3. Consolation :- Ask Ss look at the remember and use the phrases of prepositions and pronouns to make sentences.

4’

1’

- Read the text and find the answers- Play a game in groups answer the questions

- Write the answers

- Compare 2 librarys

- Write down

- Listen

- Read after the teacher- Listen and write down

- Read aloud.

- Listen carefully and make sentences.


81


4. Home work :- Learn by herart new works by writing 3 lines for each- Do exercise 4 at page 26 in work book- Prepare Unit 5 part A1,2.

- Write home work

VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Period: 26Unit 5: Work and play

Lesson 1: A - In class (A1)I. The aims

After the lesson, the students will be able to describe the work of a student at school. They use the present simple tense to talk about school subjectII. Language content


82


1. Vocabulary : - To learn about - To use how to use - To be omterested in - A map (n) - An experiment (n) - Computer science (n) 2. Grammar :

Review the present simple tense.III. Technique : Explaination , ask and answer

Students work in pairs / in groupsIV. Teaching aids

Text book , player, speakerV. Procedure

T’s activities Time Ss’ activities1. Warm up :- Greetings - Ask Ss some questions+ How many days a week do you go to school ?+ What time do you go to school ?+ What time do classes start ?+ How many subjects do you learn ?+ What is your favorite subject ? Remark then lead in new lesson2. New activities:a. Listen and read:- Introduce the lesson,then explain some new words+to learn about (v)

6’

8’

- Greetings- Answer T’s questions

- Listen carefully

- guess meanings,read new words in chorus and individually,then


83


+to use how touse+computer science(n):tin hoc+to be interested in :+A map(n):+ An experiment:-checking techrique: What and WHERE- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape(2 times)- Have Ss read the text in silent- Call on some students to read the text aloud- Correct their pronunciation.- ask Ss to read the text again then fill in the grids

- Ask Ss to exchange the results with their partners- Call on one student to go to the board and write down- Correct the mistake and give the correct answer+ To learn how to use a computer+ To study maps and learn how about different countries+ To do some experiments- Have Ss read the question and answer in the book

10’

copy down in the notebooks

- Play game

- Look at the books and listen to the tape- Read in silent- Read the text aloud

- Complete the grids

- Do individually

- Exchange the results- One students go to the board and writes- Write down

- Read aloud- make questions & answer

- Work in pairs- Practice in front of


84

Classes What do to

Computer scienceGeographyPhysics


- Ask Ss to make 5 questions and answers about Mai- Have Ss work in pairs- Call on some pairs to askand answer in front of the class- Correct the mistakes if necessary - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about themselves,using the questions given1)What time do your class start?2) What do you learn at school?3) What do you do in your computer science class?4) What do you study in your geography class?5) What do you do in your last lesson?6)What time do your classes end?- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class- Ask Ss to based on the questions to write a passage- Call on some student to read their writingAloud- Remark4. Homework:- learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each- write the passage in the notebooks- Do exercise 1,2 at page 27 in workbook- Prepare A2

8’

the class

- Work in pairs

- Practice aloud

- Write a passage

- read aloud

- Write homework

VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….


85


……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….


Lesson 2: A - In class (A2)I. The aims

After the lesson, the students read about Ba’s activities at school and at home . They use the present simple tense to talk about school subjectII. Language content1. Vocabulary : - Electronics - To repair = to fix - Household appliances - Drawing. - Artist - To be good at2. Grammar :



Text book , player, speakerV. Procedure

T’s activities Time Ss’ activities1. Warm up :- Greetings - Ask Ss some questions+ How many days a week do you go to

6’- Greetings- Answer T’s questions


86


school ?+ What time do you go to school ?+ What time do classes start ?+ How many subjects do you learn ?+ What is your favorite subject ? Remark then lead in new lesson2. New activities:a. Listen and read:- Introduce the lesson,then explain some new words b. Read, then answer the questions.- Have Ss look at 2 pictures and answer the questionsThis is Ba. What is he doing ? Introduce some new words :+ Electronics (n) : §iÖn tö + House hold appliances : c¸c vËt dông trong gia ®×nh+ To repair (v) : söa ch÷a+ To be good at : giái vÒ….+ Drawing (n) : b¶n vÏ+ Artist (n) : Häa sÜ+ To enjoy (v) : yªu thÝch- Correct their pronunciation- Checking technique : Rub out and remember- Have Ss do exercise : T or F predicition1/ Ba enjoys his school very much2/ His favorite subject is Electronics3/ In this class he does some experiments4/ He is’nt good at fixing things5/ He can help his parents at home 6/ He never goes to art club

8’

10’

- Listen carefully

- guess meanings,read new words in chorus and individually,then copy down in the notebooks

- Look at the picture and answer the questions<Students can answer the questions in Vnamese if don’t know >P2 : He’s playing the


87


- Have Ss work in groups- Call on some representatives to give their predictions- Ask Ss to read the text and check their predictions- Cal on some students to give the answers on front of the class- Correct and give the correct answers1 – T 2 – T 3 – F 5 – T 6 – F- Call on some Ss to read text aloud - Correct their pronunciation * Questions :- Ask Ss to read the text again to find out the answers for the questions- Have Ss work in pairs- Call on some pairs to ask and answer ion front of the class- Correct and give th answer keya/ He likes Electionics bestb/ Yes , he does. He enjoys school very muchc/ He learns to repair house hold applicanesd/ He will able to fix his own appliancese/ Yes , he is . His drawings are very good - About you :- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions about them selves - Make model :T : What do you do in your free timeS : I play soccerT : What are you goot at ?S : I am good at drawingT : What is your favorite aubject ?

8’

guitar

- Guess the meanings read new words in chorus and individually- Then copy down

- Work in groups- Give the prediction

- Read the text & check the prediction- Give the answers in front of the class- Copy down


- Read the text again to find out the answers- Work in pairs- Some pairs practice in front of the class- Copy down


88


S : My favorite subject is fine Arts- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class- Correct the mistakes if necessary3. Consolidation:Ask students to talk about them4. Homework:- learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each- write the passage in the notebooks- Do exercise 1,2 at page 27 in workbook- Prepare A2

- Work in pairs

- Listen carefully


the results.

- Write homework

VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

.....................................................................................................................................

................. Period: 28

Unit 5: Work and playLesson 3: A - Inclass (A4-5)

I. The aims :By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to speak about subjects at school,

what they study in each subject. They continue pratising reading skillII. Language content : 1. Vocabulary :


89


- Essay (n) - Past and present event - Author (n) - Graph (n) - Equation (n) - Globe (n) - Caculator (n) 2. Grammaar :

Reviw : The oresent simple tenseIII. Technique :

Explaination , asking and answering , group work , pair work IV. Teaching aids :

Textbook , speaker, playerV. Procedure :

T’s activities Time Ss’activities1. Warm up - Greetings- Have Ss play agame : Hangman :- Literature , History , English- Remark2. New activites <5> Read- Introduce the lesson to Ss- Ask Ss some questins such as ;+How many subjects do you study at school ?+What do you study in each subject ?+Which Subject do you like / dislike ? Why ?- Explain some new words for Ss+ essay (n)+ past and present events (n)+ author (n)- Have Ss read the passage in silent

6’

8’

- Greetings- Play a game

- Listen to the teacher- Answer T’s questions

- Listen and write down


90


- Call on some Ss to read the passage in front of the class- Correct the pronunciation- Make some questions then ask Ss to answer+ What do you study in / literature ? / history ? / Physics ? / Geography ?- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the content of the passage- Correct the mistakes- Have Ss look at the part of exercuse then explain the aims of exercise to Ss- Have Ss work in pairs reading and odding the words which are not suitable with each subject- Call on some students to give the answers- Correct the mistakes then give the correct answers+ Literature : paitings + History : baseball games+ Science : Preposition+ English : England- Ask Ss some questions about the subjects+ What do you study in literature ?+ Do you learn to play baseball in history ?- Have Ss put some more words in the subjects- Remark 3. Consolidation - Have Ss repeat about the subjects which they learnt

10’

- Read the passage in silent

- Read the passage in front of the class

- Answer T’s questions

- Work in pairs

- Listen to the teacher

- Do exercise in pairs

- Give the answers - Copy down

- Answer T’s questions

- Put some more words in the subjects

- Repeat the subjects


91


- Ask Ss to read the part remember aloud.4. Home work - Make sentences with part remember. - Do exercise 4 at page 29 in work book- Prepare part B1,2

1’- Write home work

VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Period: 29

Unit 5: Work and playLesson 4: B - It’s time for recess (B1,2)

I. The aims :By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to tell about activities at recess. They

will practice reading and listening skillsII. Language content : 1. Vocabulary :


92


- To chat (v) - To ring (v) - To skip rope - Bell(n) - Blind man’s bhaff - Marbles - Catch (n) - Recess 2. Grammar :

Review : The present continuous tense :III. Technique :

Eleciting , pairwork , asking and answeringIV. Teaching aids

Textbook , speaker, playerV.Procedure

T’s activities Time Ss’ activities1. Warm up :- Greetings- Have Ss play agame :

Noughts and crosses

- Ask Ss to make questions and answersEx : What do you learn in History class?We learn about past and present events …..2. New activities

6’

8’


2 groups take part in the game

- Listen carefully.


93

Music Geography Math

History Literature Electronics


<1> Listen and read :- Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the questions+ Where are the students ?+ What are they doing ?+ Do you like these games ?- Ask Ss to listen to the tape .- Explain some new words to Ss + Recess(n)+ Bell (n)+ Ring (v)+ To chat (v)+ To skip rope :+ Bhind man’s bluff :+ Marbles (n) :+ Catch(n) :( Use pictures to introduce new wordds )- Checking technique : What and where- Remark- Have Ss listen to the tape again & look at the book- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud - Ask Ss to complete the list :Recess activities The most popular activity+ meeting friends……

- Call on some Ss to complete the list

10’

- Look at the picture carefully and answer T’s questions+ They are in the yard+ They are playing///- Listen to the tape

- Listen- Guess the meanings read new words in chrous and individually then copy down

- Play a game

- Listen to the tape


- Complete the list :* Recess activities :+ Meeting friends :+ Talking about…+ Eating+ Dringking


94


a. Work with a partner- Revision of the present continues tense

- Ask Ss to look at the picture again then work in pairs asking anf answering about activities- Make modelS1 : What is this boy doing ?S2 : He is playing catch+ What are these students doing ? They are talking- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class- Correct the mistakes if have- Ask Ss to write down in the notebooksb. Ask and answer questions with a parter- Explain the aims of the x\exercise to Ss- Make model with a good student :+ What do you usually do at recess ?+ What do you usually do after school ?- Have Ss work in pairs- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class- Correct the mistakes if have2. Listen : Match each name to an activity- Explain the aims of the lesson :Mai, Kien , Lan , Ba are at recess- Review activities at recess- Ask Ss to predict what activity each student

8’

+ Chatting+ Playing catch/ marbles/ blindman’s bluff+ Skipping ropeThe most popular activity+ Talking- Speak about the use, form of the present continues tenseS + to be + Ving- Work in pairs

-Listen- Practice in front of the class

- Write in the notebook

- Listen to the teacher- Answer T’s questions I usually play catch or talk with my friends I usually play soccer- Work in pairs- Practice asking and answering aloud- Listen to the teacher

- Read the activities in


95


is playing at recess.- Call on 2 Ss to give their predictions.- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and check the prediction.- Play the tape again for Ss to match. - Have Ss exchange the result with a partner- Call on some Ss to give the answers- Correct and give the correct answers+ Mai is playing catch+ Kien is playing blind man’s bluff..+ Lan is skipping rape+ Ba is playing marbles3. Consolidation- Repeat the activities at recess4. Home work - Learn by heart new words by making sentences with them- Do exercise 1 at page 30 in workbook- Prepare part B3,4

4’

1’

the books- Predict.

- Give the prediction.- Listen to the tape and check.

- Listen to the tape & match.- Exchange the result- Give the answers- Copy down


- Write home work

VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….


96



Lesson : B - It’s time for recess (B3)I. The aims :

After the lesson , Ss will be able to know about activities at recess of American students. They continue practicing asking and answering about activities at recessII. Language content 1. Vocabulary - Pen pal (n) - Junior high school (n) - Energetic (adj) - To swap (v) - To score goal - Portable (adj) - Earphone (n) - To ralax(v) 2. Grammar : Review the present simple tenseIII. Technique:

Explaination, pairwork , groupwork , asking and answeringIV.Teaching aids

Textbook, V. Procedure :

T’s activities Time Ss’activities1. Warm up- Greetings- Have Ss play a game : Slap the board

6’- Greetings- Play game in 2 groups


97

Skip rope

Play blin man’s bluff

Play catch Reces

sBell

Marbles Ring


- Demonstrate the group which wins the game. Lead in new lesson2. New activities <3> Read. Then answer the questions- Ask Ss some questions about activities at recess in VN and in orther continues+ What do Vnamese students often do at recess ?+ Do you know what students in other countries often do at recess? ( or in the USA)+ What activities do you like ?- Explain some new words to Ss + Pen pal (n) : b¹n qua th+ Junior hight school (n): trêng THCS+ Energetic (adj) : N¨ng næ , hiÕu ®éng+ To score goal : Ghi bàn+ Portable (adj): Cã thÓ x¸ch tay+ Ear phones (n) : Tai nghe+ To swap (v) : Trao ®æi+ To relax (v) : Th gi·n- Cheking technique : Rub out and remember- Ask Ss to guess what students in the USA often do at recess- Call on some Ss to give their opinions- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the

8’

10’

( Each groups has 3 students to take part in the game )

- Clap hands

- Write down- Answer T’s questions

- They often play catch (marbles) blind man’s bluff or talk , drink..

- Listen carefully

- Guess meanings , read new words in chorus and individually then copy down


98


tape in order to know exatly what American students often do at recess- Have Ss read the text and list the activities the American students often do at recess- Call on some students to give the answers- Correct if necessary- Call on some students to read the text in front of the class- Correct their pronunciation*Questions :- Ask Ss to read the text again to find out the answers- Have Ss Exchange the result with their partners- Call on some Ss to give the answers- Correct and give the correct answersa. Hoa’s penpal Tim goes to an American schoolb. A ( short )c. D (mostly boys )d. D (work wide >3. consolidation :- Repeat the acivities of American students at recess- Names of activities at recess in Vietnam.4. Home work :- Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each- Do exercise 2 at pgae 31- Prepare part A1 of Unit 6.

8’

- Play a game- Guess

- Give the opinions- Look at the book and listen to the tape

- Read the text and list the activities…- Give the answers+ Play basketball+ Listen to music+ Read+ Swap baseball cards+ eating & talking- Read the text aloud

- Read the text and find out the answers- Exchange the results- Give the answers- Copy down

- Write home work


99


VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Period: 31

Unit 6: After schoolLesson 1: A - What do you to do? (A1)

I. The aims :After the lesson , Ss will be able to speak about activities after school and give

the invitation , the requestsII. Language content 1. Vocabulary : - To invite (v) - To practice (v) - To come along - Together 2. Grammar: - Let’s go to the cafeteria - Why don’t you come along ?III. Technique

Eleciting , pairwork , groupworkIV. Teaching aids :


100


Textbook , , player, speakerV. Procedure

T’s activities Ss’activities1. Warm up - Greetings - Have Ss play a game: Networks

- Have Ss go to the board and write down- Demonstrate the group which miss the games Lead the new lesson2. Presentation :- Ask Ss some questions such as: What do you often do after school ?- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer the question : What are they doing ?

- Have Ss listen to the tape- Explain some new words and structures+ To invite (v) : mêi+ To practice (v) : luyÖn tËp+ To come along : ®i cïng


- 2 groups take part in the game

- Go to the board & write

- Answer T’s questions- I often play soccer…- Look at the pictures and answer:- They are playing volleyball- They are doing their homework ………….talking- Listen to the tape- Listen carefully- Read new words in chorus and individually then copy down

+ To invite (v) : mêi+ To practice (v) : luyÖn tËp+ To come along : ®i cïng


101

After – school activities


+ Together : cïng nhau+ Let’s /go to the cafeteria and get / a cold drink / invite him+ Why don’t you / come along ? / play soccer ?- Ask Ss to make sentences using the structures:

3. Practice:- Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape again- Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialougue- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class- Correct their pronunciation- Answer :- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find out the answers- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class- Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers then ask Ss to write downa. She’s doing her math home workb. They are going to get a cold drink in the

+ Together : cïng nhau+ Let’s /go to the cafeteria and get / a cold drink / invite him+ Why don’t you / come along ? / play soccer ?

_Make sentences+ Let’s / go to the cinema / Play volley ball+ Why don’t you / relax ? / play catch ?- Listen to the tape

- Work in pairs- Practice reading the dialogue

- Read the dialogue and find the answers- Work in pairs

Write down

a. She’s doing her math home workb. They are going to get a cold


102


caferiac. He’s in the music roomd. He’slearning to phay the guitare. He usually meets his friendsf. She likes playing volleyball

4/ Home work :_Write the answers in part A1 in the notebook. Make 5 questions with each structure_Do exercise 1 at page 33 in workbook_Prepare A2

drink in the caferiac. He’s in the music roomd. He’slearning to phay the guitare. He usually meets his friendsf. She likes playing volleyball

Write home work

VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Period: 32

Unit 6: After school Lesson 2: A-What do you do?(A2)


103


I-the aims: After the lesson,Ss will be able to use adverbs of frequency with the present simple tense for after-school activitiesII-Language cantent: 1/Vocabulary: Revisionadverbs of frequency: Always,usually,sometimes,often,never 2/grammar Review:the present simple tenseIII-Technique: Eleciting,pairwork,groupwork,asking…….IV-Teaching aids Computer, projecterV-Procedure T’s action Ss’action1/Warm up:_Greetings_Have Ss review the old lesson by playing a game called slap the board_Read these words in Vietnamese+Swim+Read book+Watch T.V+Play computer games+Play soccer+Go to the movie_give the result and remark2/Presentation:_Ask SS to look at the pictures in the books carefully_Have Ss call the names of the pictures_Call on someSs to give the answers

_Greetings_Play a game slap the board_Slap in E words

_2 groups take part in the game+Swim+Read book+Watch T.V+Play computer games+Play soccer+Go to the movie

_Look at the pictures carefully_Call the names of the pictures_Give the answers


104


_Correct and give the corect answers:1/Reading/studying in the library2/Swimming in the pool3/Playing computer games4/Going to a movie5/Playing soccer6/Watching T.V_Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about the pictures_Make model What are these students doing? They are reading in the library_Call on some pairs to practice in front of the cllass3/Practiceb/Ask Ss the questions What do you usually do after school? _Have Ss play a game: Noughts and crossesAlways Go swimming OftenPlay computer games NeverGo to the library

UsuallyPlay soccerSometimes play computer gamesOftenGo to a movie

1/Reading/studying in the library2/Swimming in the pool3/Playing computer games4/Going to a movie5/Playing soccer6/Watching T.V

_Work in pairs

_Practice in front of the class

_Listen to the teacher than answerI usually play soccer_Play a game in 2 groups.

_Make questiona and answers with the cues


105


UsuallyWatch T.VOftenPlay tennisSometimesDo homework

_Remark_Ask Ss to use adverbs in the box to write a sentences for each day of the week

_Have Ss Work in pairs asking and answering_Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class_Remark and correct the mistakesNow ask and answer question,using “How often……?”_Make example with a student+How often do you go to the library?_Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering,using the pictures in the book_Call on some pairs to pratce in front of the class_Correct the mistake if have4/ Home work_Write a sentence for each day of the week , using the advends of frequency_Do exercise 2+3 at page 34 in work book_Prepare part 3,4

_Write sentences+ On Monday, I usually go to the library+ On Tuesday , I often play socer with my friend…._Work in pairs

_Practice in front of

_Answer T’s questions I always go to the library after school_Work in pairs_Practice in front of the class

_Do exercise 5

_Read the information in the table and match

_Write homework


106


VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Period: 33Unit 6: After school

Lesson 3: A_What do you do ? (3,4)I/ The aims :

After the lesson , Ss will be able to read a text for details about pastime activitiesII/ Language content1/ Vocabulary_Sport_A comie_A president_An anmversary celebration_Collect_C collector_collection2/ Grammar :Review _The pusent simple tense

_The progresstive tenseIII/ Technique :

Electing , asking and answering , pairwork , groupworkIV/ Teaching aids

Player, speakerV/ Procedure : T’s action S’s action1/ Warm up


107


_Greetings_Have Ss play a game Guessing game_Ask Ss to write pentences about the activity which they play after schoolEx : I usually play soccer after school

_Ask one student to go to the board and their friends guess_Remark2/ New activities <3> Read then answer_Have Ss look at the pictures and guess what the students are doing_Call on some students to give their prediction+ Explain some new word :+ Sporty (adj)+ Comic (n)+ a predident + an anmiversary celebration+ To collect (v) + reheares (v)+ a collection+ collection (n)_Have Ss read new words in chours and individually_checking technique What and where_Have Ss do an exercise True or False prediction :1. Nga, Ba and Nam are students in class 7 A

_Greetings_Play a game

_Write sentences

_Guess what their friends do after schoolEx : Do you play volleyball after school ?

_ Look at the picture and guess_Give the prediction

_Listen and write down+ Sporty (adj)+ Comic (n)+ a predident + an anmiversary celebration+ To collect (v) + reheares (v)+ a collection+ collection (n)

Guess meaning, read in chours and individually then copy down


108


2. They like sprots very much3. Nga’s favorite pastime is jogging4. Ba like collecting stamps5. Nam plays soccer ecery afternoon6. Nam usually watches T.V_Have Ss work in groups to give their predictions_Call on some groups to give their predictions_Ask Ss to look at the book and read in silent_Ask Ss correct the exercise_Correct then give the corret\ct answer1 – T 3 – F 5 – F2 – F 4 – T 6 – T _Call on some Ss to read the passageAloud_Correct their pronunciation_Ask Ss to look at the questions and read the passage again to find out the answers_Have Ss work in pairs_Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class_Correct the mistakes and give the correct answersa/ Her groups is rehearsaing a play for the school anniversary celebrationb/ He gets American stamps from Liz , his American friendc/ The stamp collector’s club meets on Wednesday afternoond/ Nam never plays games_Ask Ss some more questions:+ What dows Nga bike doing after school ?

_Play a game

_Do exercise in groups

1 – T 3 – F 5 – F2 – F 4 – T 6 – T

_Work in groups_Give the predictions

_Read in silent_Correct the exercise

_Read the passage loudly

_Find out the answers

_Work in pairs_Practice asking and answering_Copy down


109


+ What do Ba and his friend often do on Wednesday afternoon ?+ What do Ba and his friend often do after school hours ? <4> Listen Match each name to an activity_Introduce the aims of the exercise_Ask Ss to read the names and activities_Ask Ss to give their predictions_Have Ss listen to the tape (2 times )_Call on some Ss to give the results_Play the tape again to check the answers_Correct and give the correct answer:A – Mai – go to the school cafeteriaB – Nam – rehearse a playC – Ba – go to the circersD – Lan – watch movieE – Kien – tidy the class room 3/ Consolidation :_Repeat the activities after school hours_Ask Ss to write a paraguaph about after school activities, using matching _Remark4/ Home work_Learn by heart new words by writing 3 times for each_Do exercise 4 at page 35 in work book

_Listen carefully_Read_Give the prediction_Listen to the tape_Gice the results_Check the answers_Write down_Listen to the tape- give the correct answer:A – Mai – go to the school cafeteriaB – Nam – rehearse a playC – Ba – go to the circersD – Lan – watch movieE – Kien – tidy the class room

_Listen_Write a paragraphSpeak aloud

_Write home work

VI. Supplement:


110


……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

.....................................................................................................................................

................................Period: 34

Unit 6: After schoolLesson 4: B_Let’s go < B1 >

I/ The aimsBy the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to make/give suggestions and accept

or refuse the suggestions…II/ Language content1/ Vocabulary : Assigament (n) Fun (adj)2/ Structure :

_Let’s + V_What about + Ving ?_Why don’t / we

/ you _Responses :

_Yes, let’s_Good idea / ok_Sorry, I can’t

III/ TechniqueEliciting , pairwork , froupwprk

IV/ Teaching aidsPlayer, speaker


111


V/Procedure T’s action Ss’action1/ Warm up_Greetings_Ask Ss some questions about themselves+ What do you usually do after the school ?+ Do you like playing soccer ?+ Do you usuallt / go to the movie ? / play games ?+ How often do you go to the movie ?…._Remark2/ New activities : <1> Listen then practice in groups of flour_Introduce the situation of the dialogue : Ba , Nam , Lan and Hoa are discussing about / What they should do to relax/ How they should relax_Have Ss look at the picture and guess what activities they are talking_Call on some Ss to give their predictions_Play the tape for Ss (2 times )

_Call on one student to give the answer _Introduce some new words and structures:+ Assignment (n) = home work+ Fun (adj)+ Suggestions : + Let’s go to my house go to Lan’s house+ Why don’t you relax ?

_Greetings_Answer T’s questions

_Listen carefully

_Guess

_Give the predictions_Listen to the tape_Look at the books_Give the answer_Listen and write down+ Assignment (n) = home work+ Fun (adj)+ Suggestions : + Let’s go to my house go to Lan’s house+ Why don’t you relax ?+ What about going to the movie ?


112


+ What about going to the movie ?

_Have Ss practice the dialogue in front of the class_Call on some groups to practice in front of the class_Correct the pronunciation_Now answer :_Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find out the answers for questions_ Have Ss work in pairs_ Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class_Correct then give the correct answersa/ Nam wants to go to the moviesb/ Lan does n’t want to go to the movies because there aren’t any good movies at the momentc/ Lan wants ti kisten to music at her housed/ Hoa does n’t want to go to Lan’s house because she has too many assignmentse/ It’s Saturday_Practice_Have Ss practice , using given words :1/ Let’s / listen / music 2/ What / Watch / movie 3/ Why / join us 4/ What / go / cafeteria5/ Why / study / libraryMake model :S1 : Let’s listen to some musicS2 : Yes , let’s good idea

Read in chours and individually. Write down. Make sentences with structures

_Practice the dialogue


_Read the dialogue then find out the answersa/ Nam wants to go to the moviesb/ Lan does n’t want to go to the movies because there aren’t any good movies at the momentc/ Lan wants ti kisten to music at her housed/ Hoa does n’t want to go to Lan’s house because she has too many assignmentse/ It’s Saturday_Work in pairs_Practice asking and answering aloud_Copy down


113


_Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class_Correct the mistakes if necessary3/ Consolidation_Give a mapped dialogue then ask Ss to make a dialogue using given words & phrases You Your friend

What..do..afternoon ? Movies

Not good movie Mai’s house

Too far…not have a bike …take a bus

Ok

_Have Ss work in pairs_Call on some pairs to make a dialogue in front of the class_Correct the mistakes then give the correct dialogueS1 : What should we do this afternoon ?S2 : Let’s go to the moviesS1 : There is n’t any good movie onS2 : What about going to Mai’s house ? We can play a game togertherS1 : But It’s too far. I don’t have a bikeS2 : Why don’t we take a bus ?S1 : OK

_Practice in pairs


_Listen & make a dialogueWork in pairs _Practice in front of the class_Write down

S1 : What should we do this afternoon ?S2 : Let’s go to the moviesS1 : There is n’t any good movie onS2 : What about going to Mai’s house ? We can play a game togertherS1 : But It’s too far. I don’t have a bikeS2 : Why don’t we take a bus ?S1 : Ok


114


4/ Home work_Make & sentences for each structures_Do exercise 1 at page 35 in work book_Prepare B2

_Write home work

VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….Period: 35 Unit 6 : After school Lesson 4: B 2A. Objectives: - At the end of the lesson. Ss can read for details about pupils’ leisure activities I. Knowledges : - vocab about leisure activities II. Skills: reading III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan.B. Procedures : I. Settlement: Greeting and check students’ attendence II.Checking: Guessing game: Each student write a kind of sport they like, a student stand before the class . Ps student make Yes/ No question and If the answer is Yes. the questioner goes on board and replace ex: S1: Do you play computer games after school? S2: Yes I do III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities

1.Pre- reading: a. Vocab:- scout ( trans)- teenager ( definition)- community service ( example)

Student’s activities

- Ss listen and repeat in chorus and individually, then answer meaning, stress and copy down.


115


- volunteer ( trans)- campaign ( exam)- T elicits new words and reads each 3 time then writes on the board and asks ss the meaning and stress, kinds of speech. *Check: R. or.Rb. Things American teenagers like to do best in free time.-T asks ss to work in groups and to write the board .

G1 G2 G3 G4

2.While- reading: a. Check prediction:-T asks ss to read and checks their predictionKeys: - eat in fast food restaurant

- attend youth arganization.....- learn to play the musial

instruments- go shopping- watch TV- go to the movies- listen to music- collect things- make models of things- help old people

b. Comprehension:- T asks ss to read the text and anwer the question.How do some teenager help the

- Ss predict in groups and write down.

-Ss read the text and checks their prediction

- Ss read the text and anwer the question.Ss: They help elderly people. They do their shopping . They do their housework. They clean their yard......


116


community?*Keys: They help elderly people. They do their shopping . They do their housework. They clean their yard......3. Post- reading:- T asks ss to think 3 most popular activities Vietnamese tennagers like to do to help the community T asks some students to say before the classKeys: Students’ answers

- Ss think 3 most popular activities Vietnamese tennagers like to do to help the community

IV. Consolidation:- T asks ss to remind the leisure activities American teenagers like to do V. Homework: - T asks ss to learn vocab and prepare B 3

VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Period : 36 Unit 6 : After school Lesson 5: B3A. Objectives: -At the end of the lesson, ss can practice further in making suggestions, arrangements and accepting the invitation. I. Knowledges: - Would you like to...............? - Yes, I ‘d love to/ I’m sorry, I can’t II. Skills: speaking III. Preparation: Book, board, lesson plan.B. Procedures: I. Settlement: Greeting and check students’ attendence II.Checking: hot seat

listen to music / go to the movies / watch TV / play video games.


117


- T asks ss to play in groups, one person sits back the board and listens the cues , and guess the words.

III. New lesson:Teacher’s activities

1. Presentation: a. Presentation Dialogue:

-T sets the scene and reads as the model-T asks ss to repeat in chorus and then practice in pairs.-T elicits the target language and models 3 times then T writes on the board.b. Model sentences:S1: Would you like to come to my house for lunch?S2: Yes, I’d love to / I’m sorry, I can’t.-T checks the meaning, usage and form2. Practice: Board Drill:-T shows the cues on board and asks ss to make the invitations . a. go shopping /

b. go to the movies / c. play video games / d. listen to music / e. go out for dinner /

Ex: S1: Would you like to go out for a walk? S2: Yes I’d love to / I’m sorry , I can’t.- T gives feedback.3. Production: *Mapped Dialogue:-T shows the cues on the board and asks ss to make the dialogue in pairs.

Students’ activities

-Ss repeat in chorus and then practice reading the dialogue in pairs.

-Ss listen to the moel sentences and repeat in chorus and invidually.

-Ss work in pairs to make the invitations with word cueS1: Would you like to go shopping?S2: Yes, I’d love toS1:Would you like to go to the movie?S2: I’m sorry, I can’t

-Ss make the dialogue in pairs.


118


Would/ you/ go out/ dinner? What time?

5.00 Where / can/ meet?

Bus stop I/ be/ there. Thanks/ inviting/ me

You’re welcome/ Bye / see you . Bye/ see you

Nam: Would you like to go out for dinner?Lan : Yes, I’d love to. What time?Nam: At 5.00Lan : Where can we meet?Nam: At the bus stop.Lan: Thanks for inviting me.Nam : You’re welcome. Bye. See you soonLan: Bye, see you soon

IV. Consolidation: -T asks ss : How do you say If you want to invite your friends to do somethings? V. Homework: - learn model sentences and prepare the next period

VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Period : 37 Language Focus 2


119


A Objective: - At the end of the lesson, ss can practice further in making suggestions, the present progressive and simple present tenses , vocab about subject and activities at recess and after school, the question: What time......? I. Knowledges : - suggestions, the present progressive and simple present tenses , vocab about subject and activities at recess and after school, the question: What time......? II. Skills: speaking and writing III. Preparation: Book, board, lesson plan. B. Procedures : I. Settlement: Greeting and check students’ attendence II.Checking: read the text in B3. III. New lesson:

Teacher’s activities

1. Present progressive tense:-T asks ss some questions to remind the structure of the progressive tense and then T writes on boardex: What are you doing now? or T shows a picture and asks ss: What is the man doing? S + to be + Vingex 1.p.68:-T asks Ss to do individually and then share ideas with partners-T asks some ss to answer and T correctsKeys: is doing, is writing, is reading, is cooking, are playing, is kicking, running.2.Time:T writes the cues on board and asks Ss to make the questions and answers on


- Ss remind the structure of the progressive tense

-Ss do individually and then share ideas with partners

-Ss make the questions and answers on notebooks.S1: What time do Hoa’s classes start?


120


notebooks.

Name Time ActivitiesYou 6.00 go to schoolHoa 7.15 classes startYou 11.00 classes

finishHai 11.30 have lunch

Hieu 4.15 play soccer

Ex: What time do you go to school? I go to school at 6.00.

3. Simple present:ex 5.p.71:T gives the instructions T correctsex: Ba always plays .............4. Making sugestions:Noughts and Crosses:T asks Ss to remind 3 ways to give out suggestions:T writes on board What about + Ving ? Why do’nt we + V( inf)? Let’s + V( inf). Agree: Yes , that’s a good idea.Disagree: No, I’m sorry I can’t.

go to the cafeteria go to the movies drink a cup of tea dance with me play games

S2: Her classes start at 7.15S1: What time do your classes finish?S2: My classes finish at 11.00S1: What time does Hai have lunch?S2: He has lunch at 11.30S1: What time does Hieu play soccer?S2: He plays soccer at 4.15

-Ss writes the sentences on notebooks

Ss remind 3 ways to give out suggestions

Example:What about going to the cafeteria? Yes , that’s a good idea.


121


watch TV play soccer go fishing go to my houseT asks Ss to play the games in 2 groupseach pairs choose the cues and make the ques and anwersWhat about going to the cafeteria? Yes , that’s a good idea.5. Vocab about sujects:ex 4.p.70:T asks Ss to match the subjects with the pictures:Keys: a. Physical Education b. Chemistry c.Math d.Geography e.English f.History..

Ss match the subjects with the picturesKeys: a. Physical Education b. Chemistry c.Math d.Geography e.English f.History.

IV. Consolidation:V. Homework: - prepare for the 45 minute test

VI. Supplement:…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

******************************************Period : 38

45 minute testA.Objectives : T can check Ss’ understanding and help Ss to review the structures and vocab in the unit 4,5 and 6


122


I. Knowledges: the structures and vocab in the unit 4,5 and 6II. Skills: writing and readingIII. Preparation : test papers

Ma trận đề kiểm tra

Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng TổngTN TL TN TL TN TL

I. Pronunciation

4 1.0

4 1.0

II+III.Language

focus

4 1.

0

4 1.0

42.0

8 4.0

IV.Reading 8 0.

25

8 2.

0V.Writing 6

2.5

6 3.

0Total 8

2.0

13 5.5

5 2.5

26 10.

0

B. Contents :M· ®Ò 1C©u I. T×m tõ kh«ng cïng nhãm nghÜa víi 3 tõ cßn l¹i 1. a. listen b. work c.read d. write2.a. doctor b. teacher c. worker d. guitar3.a. experiment b. physics c. literature d.math4.Monday b. Tuesday c.June d. SundayC©u II. Chän A,B,C,or D ®Ó hoµn thµnh c¸c c©u (2,0®iÓm)1. She .............experiments in Physics class a. plays b. reads c. does d. make.


123


2. ...........go to the movies . a. Let’s b. What about c.Why don’t we d. a and c3. We write essays in.................... a. History b. Music c.Geography d. Literature 4. They are interested.................literature a. in b. at c. on d.to5. .................does Lan have science class ? - At 8:40 a.When b. What time c. How long d.Where6.We learn about................in History a. maps b.plants and animals c. events d. songs7. Lan ................interested in colecting stamps. a. always is b.is always c. always d. are8. Now , they .................comics a. read b. are reading c. reads d. is readingC©u III. Cho d¹ng ®óng cña ®éng tõ trong ngoÆc: (2 ®iÓm)

1. Lan and Hoa .........................( read ) in the library at the monent2. We........................... (not come ) here tomorrow morning3. Nam ........................(go) to the English club every Saturday4. You can................... (find) the math books on the racks in the middle

C©u IV/ Chän tõ thÝch hîp ®Ó ®iÒn vµo ®o¹n v¨n :( 2 ®iÓm)

enjoy – study – many – Language – about – events – Geography – how

At school we ..............many things. In Literature, we learn..........books and write essays. In History , we study past and present................in Vietnam and around the world. In..................., we study different countries and their people. In Physics , we learn about ............. things work. In the .................... class, we study English. We study................ other things as well, such as Music, Sports and Art. We ...............all of our classes. C©u V/ Dùa vµo tõ gîi ý ®Ó viÕt thµnh c©u hoµn chØnh: (3,0®iÓm)1.What about/ play/ marbles ……………………………………………………

2. We/ have/ Math/English/tomorrow


124


……………………………………………………………..

3. What time/ your classes / start ? ……………………………………………………………..

4. Nam/ often/ rehearse/ play/ after school ……………………………………………………….

6. Viết lại câu sao cho nghĩa không đổi

a. Why don’t we go shopping together?- Let’s………………………………………………………………b. We like to walk in the rain- We enjoy…………………………………………………………

M· ®Ò 2 C©u I. T×m tõ kh«ng cïng nhãm nghÜa víi 3 tõ cßn l¹i 1. a. listen b. read c .work. d. write2.a. guitar b. teacher c. worker d. doctor 3.a. experiment b. physics c. literature d. math4. June b. Tuesday c. Monday . d. Sunday II.Chän A,B,C,or D ®Ó hoµn thµnh c¸c c©u (2,0®iÓm)1.We learn about................in History a. maps b.plants and animals c. events d. songs2. Lan ................interested in colecting stamps. a. always is b.is always c. always d. are3. Now , they .................comics a. read b. are reading c. reads d. is reading4. She .............experiments in Physics class a. plays b. reads c. does d. make.5. ...........go to the movies . a. Let’s b. What about c.Why don’t we d. a and c6. We write essays in.................... a. History b. Music c.Geography d. Literature 7. They are interested.................literature a. in b. at c. on d.to


125


8. .................does Lan have science class ? - At 8:40 a.When b. What time c. How long d.WhereC©u III. Cho d¹ng ®óng cña ®éng tõ trong ngoÆc: (2 ®iÓm) 1.Lan and Hoa .........................( play ) soccer at the monent 2.He........................... (not come ) here tomorrow morning 3.We ........................(go) to the English club every Saturday 4.You can................... (find) the math books on the racks in the middleC©u IV. Chän tõ thÝch hîp ®Ó ®iÒn vµo ®o¹n v¨n :( 2 ®iÓm)

enjoy – study – many – Language – about – events – Geography – how

At school we ..............many things. In Literature, we learn..........books and write essays. In History , we study past and present................in Vietnam and around the world. In..................., we study different countries and their people. In Physics , we learn about ............. things work. In the .................... class, we study English. We study................ other things as well, such as Music, Sports and Art. We ...............all of our classes. C©u V. Dùa vµo tõ gîi ý ®Ó viÕt thµnh c©u hoµn chØnh: (3,0®iÓm)1.What about/ go/ movie………………………………………………………………….

2. I/ have/ Geography /English/tomorrow ………………………………………………………………..

3. What time/ your classes / start ? ……………………………… ………………………………..

4. Nga/ often/ play/ chess/ after school ……………………………………………………………….

6. Viết lại câu sao cho nghĩa không đổi

a. Why don’t we go shopping together?- Let’s………………………………………………………………b. We like to walk in the rain- We enjoy…………………………………………………………


126


.....................................................................................................................................

..................................

Period : 39

CORECTING THE TEST

I. The aims:By the end of the lesson .ss will be able to assess their knowledge in order to improve their

gaps

II. Preparing: paper sheet

III/procedure:

STAGES CONTENTS NOTES

Activity1

Activity2

Activity3

C©u I. T×m tõ kh«ng cïng nhãm nghÜa víi 3 tõ cßn l¹i 01:

1.B 2.D 3.A 4. C

02:

1.C 2.A 3.A 4. A

II.Chän A,B,C,or D ®Ó hoµn thµnh c¸c c©u Each correct sentence gives 0,25.

01:

1.C 2. 3. D 4. A 5. B 6. C 7. B 8. B

02:

1.C 2.B 3.B 4. C 5. A 6. D 7. A 8. B

C©u III. Cho d¹ng ®óng cña ®éng tõ trong ngoÆc:0,5/one answer

01

1. are reading

2.don’t come

3. goes

4. find

T:give answer

Ss: correct

T:call ss to give

answer

T:correct and give

mark

T:ask ss to give the

answers and correct


127


Activity4

Activity5

02

1. are playing

2.doesn’t come

3. go

4. find

C©u IV. Dùa vµo tõ gîi ý ®Ó viÕt thµnh c©u hoµn chØnh:0,25/one answer

1.study

2.about

3. events

4.geography

5. different

6. how

7. language

8. many

C©u V. Dùa vµo tõ gîi ý ®Ó viÕt thµnh c©u hoµn chØnh:01

1.What about playing marbles?

2. I will have Math and English tomorrow.

3. What time does your classes start?

4. Nam often rehearse the play after school.

5.a. Let’s go shopping together

b. We enjoy walking in the rain.

02

1.What about going to the movie?

2.I will have Geography and English tomorrow.

3. What time does your classes start?

4. Nga often play chess after school.

5.a. Let’s go shopping together

b. We enjoy walking in the rain.

T: call each Ss to

give the answerand

correct

T call students to go

to the board and

write


128


Homework

2’ Prepare unit 4 – A1,2,3

VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

.....................................................................................................................................

.................................

Period 40 Unit 7 : The world of workLesson 1 A student’s work (A1)

A / Aims and Objectives 1. Ojectives : After the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about a student’s work

and practice comparativers with fewer and more2. Teaching points: -Review the present tense

-Structure : that takes about 2 hours each daB / PrepairationS

1.Teacher :Textbooks , chalks , player, speaker2. Students : books, notebooks..

C / Procedure 1. Ogernirations (1’)

Good morning !How are you today ?

2. Checking up: (passover)3. New lesson (39’)

T’s action Ss’ action1/ Warm uo :_Greetings_Ask some questions about themselves

_Greetings_Answer T’s questions


129


+ What time do your classes start ?+ What time do they finish ?+ How many hours a day do you do your home work Remark and lead in new lesson :2/ New activities :a/ Presentation_Introduce the lesson “ You wil hear a cowersation between Hoa and her uncle about school work “_Explain some new words :+ An hour (n)+ To last (v)+ Hard+ Late Later+ Early earlier+ Few fewer+ Many more_Have Ss play a game Rub put and remember_Have Ss predict the answers ,using questions a,b,c,da/ What time do Hoa’s classes start and finishb/ Do your classes start earlier or later ?c/ How many hours a day does Hoa do her homework ?d/ Do you work fewer or more hours than Hoa ?_Ask Ss to work in groups_Call on some representatwes to give their predictions

They start atThey finish at

_Listen carefully

_Listen and write down+ An hour (n)+ To last (v)+ Hard+ Late Later+ Early earlier+ Few fewer+ Many more

_Guess meanings, read in chours and individually copy down

_Play game

_Predict the answersa/ Her classes start at 7 o’clockb/ They finish at a quarter past elcrion c/ She does her home work 2 hours a day


130


_Presentation dialogue_Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape_Ask them to read the dialogue a gain and check their preditions_Remark_Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue_Call on some pairs to role phay the dialogue in front of the class_Correct the pronunciation_Questions _Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the questions_Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions in front of the class_Correct the mistakes and give the correct answersa/ Her classes start at 7 o’clockb/ They finish at a quarter past elcrion c/ She does her home work 2 hours a dayd/ She will visit her parents on their farm during her vacationb/ Practice :_Explain the structure That takes about 2 hours each day= It takes Hoa about 2 hours to do her home work each day It takes Sb to make examples_Ask Ss to make examples_Give word cue to drikl+ Hoa’s classes : 7:00 Our classes : 6:45

d/ She will visit her parents on their farm during her vacation

+Work in groups_Give the predictions

_Look at the book & listen to the tape_Read the dialogue and check the prediction_Work in pairs_Practice the dialogue in front of the class

_Work in pairs

_Practice in front of the class_Copy down

_Listen carefully and write down

_Make examples


131


+ The film : 9:30+ The play : 10 :00+ Hoa (work ) : 2 hoursMiss Mai : 4 hoursMake exampleS1 : Hoa’s classes start later than ourclassesS2 : Our classes start earlier than Hoa’s classes_Have Ss work in pairs_Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class_Correct the mistakesc/ Production_Ask Ss to make sentences comparing their work with Hoa’s work using earber/later/fewer/more_Have Ss exchange the results with their partners_Call on some students to read then sentences aloud_Remark3/ Consoldation4/ Home work _Learn by heart new words 48 in work book

_Write downS1 : Hoa’s classes start later than ourclassesS2 : Our classes start earlier than Hoa’s classess_Listen

_Work in pairs_Practice in front of the class

_Make sentences

_Exchange the results

_Read aloud

+ Do exercise 1 at page

VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

.....................................................................................................................................

...................................Period 41


132


Unit 7 : The world of workLesson 2 : A student’s work (2,3)

A / Aims and Objectives 1. Ojectives : -By the end of the lesson , Ss will be bale to compare American

students’vacations and Vietnamese students’ vacations. -Praticing reading and listening skills

2. Teaching points: _The present simple tense _Comparetive with later/earlier/fewer/more

B / PrepairationS1.Teacher :Textbooks , chalks , boards ,player, speaker2. Students : books, notebooks..

C / Procedure 1. Ogarnirations


2. Checking up: (passover)3. New lesson (39’)

T’s action Ss’action1/ Warm up & check_Greetings_Have Ss play a game : PelmanismEarly/ late/ longer/ few/ long / earlier / later / fewer_Device the class into 2 groups_Ask them to play game_Remark2/ New activities <2> Read them answer the questions_Introduce the situation of the lesson


_Play game

_Listen carefully


133


_Present some new words:+ To celebrate (v) : tổ chức, kỉ niệm+ Easter :+ Thanks giving :+ New year’s Eve : + Independence Day :+ Chistmas _Correct their pronunciation_Checking technique What and Where_Ask Ss to do exercise T or F before reading the letter1/ Vnamese students have fewer vacation than American students2/ American students have the longest vacation in winter3/ They don’t have a Tet holiday4/ their most important vacation is New year’s day5/ They usually spend their time with their families on Thanks giving and Chirstmas Day_Call on some groups to give their predictions_Ask Ss to look at the book and read the letter_Ask them to check their predictions_Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class_Correct and give the correct answers1 – T 2 – F 3 - T4 – F 5 – T

_Listen_Guess meanings, read new worlds in chorus and individually copy down+ To celebrate (v) : tổ chức, kỉ niệm+ Easter :+ Thanks giving :+ New year’s Eve : + Independence Day :+ Chistmas

_Play game:

_Do exercise

_Work in groups predicting the statements T or F

1 – T 2 – F 3 - T4 – F 5 – T

_Give the precdictions_Read the letter_Check the predictions_Give the answers


134


_Call on 2 3 students to read the letter aloud_Questions :_Have Ss work in pairs_Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of the class_Correct the mistakes and give the correct answersa/ Summer vacation in the longest in Americab/ During his vacation, Tim spends time with his familyc/ Vnamese students have fewer vacations than american students_Have Ss fill in the grids

<3> Listen. Write the name_Ask Ss to look at the pictures carefully_Ask Ss to predict the name of each picture

_Play the tape for Ss ( 2times)_Call on some Ss to give their answers in front of the class_Correct and give the correct answersa/ Thanhs givingb/ Independence Dayc/ New year’s Eved/ Chistmas3/ Consolidation_Ask Ss to repeat (about) the names of the public holidays in American and Vnamese

_Read the letter aloud

_Work in pairs_Practice in front of the class_Copy down

_Fill in the grids

_Look at the pictures carefullyPrecdict the names of each pictures_Listen to the tape_Match the name with the pictures_Listen & check the answers_Give the answers_Copy downa/ Thanhs givingb/ Independence Dayc/ New year’s Eved/ Chistmas

_Repeat the names of the public holidays

_Write home work


135


4/ Home work_Learn by heart new words by writing 2 times for each_Do exercise 4 at page 44 in workbook_Prepare part 4VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

.....................................................................................................................................

...................................Period 42 Unit 7 : The world of work

Lesson 3 : A student’s work (A4)A / Aims and Objectives

1. Ojectives : After the lesson , Ss will be able to know about a typical student’s life. They will continue practicing reading comprehension

2. Teaching points: _The present simple tense _Comparaties with few/many

B / PrepairationS1.Teacher :Textbooks , chalks , projector, computer.2. Students : books, notebooks..

C / Procedure 1. Ogernirations


2. Checking up: (passover)3. New lesson

T’s action S’s action


136


1/ Warm up :_Greetings_Have Ss play a game Net work

American public holidays _Devide the class into 2 groups _Call on 2 dtudents represented for their groups to go to the board and write down_Remark2/ Pre_reading_Ask Ss some questions alout them selves+ What do you do every day ?+ How many hours a day do you study ?+ Do you have to do a lot of home work ?+ (Have) Introduce the situation of the lesson_Explain some new words+ period+ To review + Typical+ Keen + Lazy+ To take a look + Definitely_Have Ss play a game_Remark_Ask Ss to prediet the information about Hoa1/ Hoa goes to school __day a week2/ She has__periods aday3/ She works __hours a week4/ She has about__ hours of home work every week


_2 students go to the board and write_Answer T’s questions

_Listen to the teacher_Listen carefully

Guess meanings, read new words in chours and individually , then copy down+ period+ To review + Typical+ Keen + Lazy+ To take a look + Definitely_Play game_Predice the information about Hoa

1/ Hoa goes to school __day a week2/ She has__periods aday3/ She works __hours a week4/ She has about__ hours of home


137


5/ Before test , she works __hours a week

Have Ss work in groups_Call on some representativies to give the predictions3/ While_reading_Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape_Ask them to read the text in silent and check their prediction_Call on some Ss to give the answers_Correct and give the correct answers1/ 6 days2/ 5 period3/ 20 hours4/ 12 hours5/ 45 hours_Call on 3 4 students to read the text aloud_Correct their pronunciation_Questions_Ask Ss to read the text again & find ort the answers_Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers1/ Why do some people think that students have an easy life ?2/ Lucky number1. LN.2. d. No, he does’nt.3. b. She works about 45 hours a week.4. LN.

work every week5/ Before test , she works __hours a week

_Work in groups_Give the predictions_Listen to the tape_Read & check the prediction_Give the answers1/ Hoa goes to school _6_days a week2/ She has_5_periods aday3/ She works _20_hours a week4/ She has about _12_ hours of home work every week5/ Before test , she works _45_hours a week_Read the text aloud

_Read the text then find put the answers_Play game in groups

_Answer the questions based on the text

1. LN.2. d. No, he does’nt.3. b. She works about 45 hours a


138


5. a. Because they think Students only work a few hours, and had long vacations.

6. c. Student’s answer,7. LN.8. How many periods a day does Hoa have?

59. Do you think you are lazy? Ss’ answers_Remark4/ Post_reading_Ask Ss some questions :+ What do you think of a students life ?+ Do you think students are lazy ?_Remark5/ Home work_Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each_Write the answer in the notebooks_Do exercise 2,3 at page 43,44 in work book_Prepare part B1

week.4. LN.5. a. Because they think Students

only work a few hours, and had long vacations.

6. c. Student’s answer,7. LN.8. How many periods a day does

Hoa have? 59. Do you think you are lazy? Ss’ answers

_Write home work_Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each_Write the answer in the notebooks_Do exercise 2,3 at page 43,44 in work book_Prepare part B1

VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

.....................................................................................................................................

......................................Period 43 Unit 7 : The world of work

Lesson 4 : B1,4


139


A / Aims and Objectives 1. Ojectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about Tim’s

Parents ‘job and the time they work in aweek . They continue practicing reading comprehension .

2. Teaching points: _The present simple tense _Comparaties with few/many

B / PrepairationS1.Teacher :Textbooks , chalks , player,speaker2. Students : books, notebooks..



2. Checking up: (passover)3. New lesson

T’s Action Ss’ Action 1. Warm up :

- Greetings .- Ask students somes questions about

Hoa and themselves .+ What do you think about Hoa ?+ How many periods a day do you have ? + What do you think about students’ life ?- Remark

2. New activities : Pre – reading : -Introduce the situation of the lesson -Explain some new words or phrases :

+ To take care of ( v ) = to look after

-Greetings . -Answer T’ questions

- Listen to the teacher - Listen and write -

+ To take care of ( v ) = to look after + To work part – time +Mechanic ( n )


140


+ To work part – time +Mechanic ( n ) + Machine ( n ) + Shift ( n )

+ Homeless ( adj ) Checking technique : Play a game : What and where Ordering the main ideas :

- Ask Ss to predict the order of the main ideas

a. Mr Jones’s work .b. Tim’s introduction of his family.c. Mr Jones’s vacation time .d. Mrs. Jones’s work .- Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to give their

predictions in front of the class. While – reading :

- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape .

- Ask Ss to read the letter then check their predictions.

-Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class

- Correct and give the correct answers 1. B 2. D 3. A 4. C -Call some Ss to read the letter in front of the class

-Correct the pronunciation .- Have Ss work in pairs asking and

+ Machine ( n ) + Shift ( n )

+ Homeless ( adj ) Play a game : what and where .

- Predict the order of the main ideas .

-Work in pairs - Give the predictions .1. B 2. D 3. A 4. C

- Look at the book and listen to the tape

- Read the letter and check the prediction

- Give the answers

- Read the letter in front of the class.

-

- Work in pairs

- Practice in front of the class .

- Copy down.


141


answering the questions in the book .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.

- Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers :

a. Mrs. Jones works at home . But three mornings a week she works part – time at a local supermarket.

b. She cooks for homeless people once a week .

c. Mr. Jones is a mechanic . He repairs machines in a factory .

d. He works about 40 hours a week .e. The Jones family always goes to

Florida on vacation . They have a great time there .

Post – reading : Ask Ss to base on Tim’s letter to write a letter with the information about their own family.-Ask Ss to exchange their letters with their partners

- Call on some Ss to read the letter in front of the class.

- Correct the mistakes if necessary .3. Consolidation :

-Ask Ss to repeat the work of the Jones family .

- Remark

Mrs. Jones works at home . But three mornings a week she works part – time at a local supermarket.

She cooks for homeless people once a week .Mr. Jones is a mechanic . He repairs machines in a factory .He works about 40 hours a week .The Jones family always goes to Florida on vacation . They have a great time there .

-Write a letter about their own family . - Exchange the letters with the partners

- Read the letter in front of the class .

- Repeat the Jones family ‘ work .

- Write homework .


142


4. Homework :- Learn by heart new words by writing

2 lines with each . - Do exercise 1, 2 at page 44 , 45 in

workbook.- Prepare part 2,3

VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

.....................................................................................................................................

.................................Period 44

Unit 7 : The world of workLesson 4 : B2,3

A / Aims and Objectives 1. Ojectives : After the lesson , the students continue practicing reading skill

and comparative with fewer , less and more . 2. Teaching points: _The present simple tense _Comparaties with few/many

B / PrepairationS1.Teacher :Textbooks , chalks , boards …2. Students : books, notebooks..



2. Checking up: (passover) 3. New lesson(


143


Teacher’s Activities

1. New activities :a. Read ._ Ask Ss to look at the picture answer the question :Can you guess what the man does ?What are the daily duties of a farmer ?_ Introduce the situation of the lesson ._ Explain some new words to Ss. + To feed ( v ) : + To rest ( v ) : + Main crop ( n) : + Buffalo shed ( n ) : + Chicken coop ( n ) : + Real ( adj ) :

Checking technique : Rub out and remember .

Presentation text :_ give some questions about Mr. Tuan and ask Ss to guess the answers .+ Does Mr. Tuan work more hours than Tim’s father ?+ What time does he start work ? + What time does his work finish ?+ How many vacations does Mr. Tuan have ?_ Call some Ss to give their prediction ._ Ask Ss to read the text about Mr. Tuan then check their predictions ._ Call on some Ss to give the answers


Ss listen and repeatin chorus and individually.Ss copy.Guess the meaning , read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down.

+ To feed ( v ) : + To rest ( v ) : + Main crop ( n) : + Buffalo shed ( n ) : + Chicken coop ( n ) : + Real ( adj ) :

Play game

_ Guess the answers .

_ Give the prediction ._ Read the text and check the predictions ._ Give the answers a. Yes, he does.b. He starts work at 6: 00


144


_Call some Ss to read the text aloud ._ Correct the pronunciation .b. Compare :_Ask Ss to read the text about Mr. Tuan again and the letter of Tim then make note about them .

_Ask Ss to exchange the result with the partner .

_Call on some Ss to give the result in front of the class ._Correct the mistakes and give the correct answer

2. Consolidation :_Ask Ss to use the information about Mr. Tuan and Mr. Jones to write sentences , using comparative ._ Example : Mr. Tuan works more hours than Mr. Jones .Or : Mr. Jones works fewer hours than Mr. Tuan._ Call on some Ss to go to the board and write down ._ Correct the mistakes and ask them to write in the notebooks .

3. Homework :

c. His work finishes at 6 pmd. He has no real vacations ._Read the text aloud .

_Read the text about Mr. Tuan and the letter then make note. _ Exchange the result with the partner .

_ Give the result in front of the class.

_ Write down .

_ Listen .

_Go to the board and write . Mr. Jones has more vacations than Mr. Tuan.Or: Mr. Tuan has fewer vacations than Mr. Jones ._ Write in the notebooks .

Write homework .


145


_Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each ._Do exercise 2, 3 at page 45, 46 in workbook.

_ Prepare part 4,5. IV. Consolidation: V. Homework :

learn vocab prepare B4-5VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Period 45UNIT 8: PLACES

Lesson 1 : A_ Asking the way (1,2)A / Aims and Objectives

1. Ojectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to ask and answer the way to the places . From that they will apply it in the life .

2. Teaching points: - Could you tell me how to get there ?-Could you show me the way to …….?

B / PrepairationS1.Teacher :Textbooks , chalks , boards …2. Students : books, notebooks..



2. Checking up: (passover) 3. New lesson(39’)


146


T’s Action Ss’ Action 1. Warm up :_ Greetings ._ Have Ss play a game : Jumbled words BKAN LOIPHATS TOHEL NSTOAIT TAMREK TOSP FEIFCO_ Call 2 students to go to the board and rearrange these words ._ Correct the mistake and give the correct answer : BANK HOSPITAL HOTEL STATION MARKET POST OFFICE 2. New activities :* Name the places :_ Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book carefully ._ Have Ss call the names of the pictures ._ Call some Ss to give the answer in front of the class._ Correct and give the correct answer :a. National bank of Vietnam b. Saint Paul hospital c. Hotel .d. The central post office e. Hanoi railway station f. Dong xuan market Listen and repeat . Then practice the

dialogue with a partner ._ Ask Ss to look at the book and answer the questions : Who are they ?

_ Greetings ._ Play a game .

_ Rearrange the jumbled words . BANK HOSPITAL HOTEL STATION MARKET POST OFFICE

_ Look at the pictures carefully ._ Call the names of the pictures .

_ Write down .

National bank of Vietnam Saint Paul hospital Hotel .The central post office Hanoi railway station Dong xuan market

Look at the book and answer the questions .


147


Where are they ? What does the tourist want ?_ Introduce the situation : A tourist is asking the way ._ Present some new words and structures : + A souvenir shop ( n ) + Could you tell me how to get there ? + Could you show me the way to the supermarket? +Go straight ahead . Take the first street . + Go straight to the first street . Turn left ._Ask Ss to make sentences with the structures .

_ Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then answer the question : Where does the tourist want to go ?_ Call on one student to answer the question . _ Ask Ss to listen to the tape and read after the tape . _ Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs ._ Call on some pairs to read in front of the class ._ Correct the pronunciation. _ Give some places and ask Ss to practice in pairs . Rong market , Post office .

_ Listen to the teacher .

_ Listen and write .

Read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down .

_ Make sentences .S1 : Could you tell me how to get to the theater ?S2 : Go straight ahead . Turn left . It’s on your right ._ Look at the book and listen to the tape .

_ Answer the question :He wants to get to a souvenir shop ._ Read after the tape ._ Work in pairs ._ Practice in front of the class._ Practice in pairs .

_ Practice in front of the class S1: Could you show me the way to Rong market ?S2: Go straight ahead . Turn left . It’s on your right .

_ Practice in pairs asking and


148


_ Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .

_ Correct the mistake if necessary .3.Consolidation :_ Ask Ss to practice asking and answering the way to the places in their neighborhood ._ Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. _ Remark and repeat the structures about asking the way .4.Homework :_ Learn by heart new structures by making 3 sentences with them ._ Do exercise 1 at page 47 in workbook ._ Prepare part 3.

answering the way ._ Practice in front of the class

_ Listen to the teacher .

Write homework .

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………


149


Unit 8 : Places Lesson 2: A3 A Objective:- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to practice further with asking for and giving directions, using Where is……………………….? I.Knowledges : - vocab about places, pre of places, directions., where is…..? II. Skill: speaking III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan B. Procedures : I. Settlement II.Checking Brainstorm: T draws on board and asks Ss to think out the prepositions they ‘ve learned and then write on board.

Prepositions of place - near Behind on in next to III. New lesson:

Teacher’s activities Ss ‘activities 1.Presentation: T sets the scene and elicit the model dia T writes on board :Nam: Where is the bank?Hoa : The bank is between the hotel and the restaurant It’s opposite the park. To ask the way we can use Where is………………? 2. Practice: Map.p.81 – text book:

- Bank- Police station

Ss listen and copy


150


- Bookstore- Restaurant- Post office- School.

T asks Ss to look at the map on p.81 . work in pairs, ask and answer about some placesEx: 3. Production:Listen to the tape and write the places:

a. sourvernirb. shoe storec. hoteld. drug storee. hospital.

T reads and asks Ss to listen and write

Ss look at the map on p.81 . work in pairs, ask and answer about some places

Ss listen and write

IV. Consolidation:

T asks Ss to remind how to ask for directions. V. Homework:Prepare A 4-5.

.....................................................................................................................................

.....................................UNIT 8: PLACES

Period 49 Lesson 2 : A_ Asking the way ( 4-5 )A / Aims and Objectives

1. Ojectives : -The students will continue to practice asking for and giving directions to the places and prepositions of place . -Practice speaking and writing skills .

2. Teaching points: The simple present tense with the Structures of asking and answering the way .B / PrepairationS


151


1.Teacher :Textbooks , chalks , boards …2. Students : books, notebooks..




T’s Activities Ss’ Activities 1. Warm up :_ Greetings ._ Have Ss play a game : Networks .

_ Call 2 students from 2 groups to go to the board and write down ._ Remark .2. Presentation :_ Ask Ss to look at the street map carefully .

_Ask them to call the places in the street map .

6’

8,

_ Greetings ._ Play a game : Networks.

_ 2 groups take part in the game .

_ Go to the board and write down .

_ Look at the street map carefully ._ Call the places in the street map._ Say about the places’ positions._ Listen carefully .


152

Prepositions of places


_ Have Ss say about the places’ positions .

_ Introduce the question and answer about the places .Example : Where is the bank ? The bank is between the hotel and the restaurant . It’s opposite the hospital .3. Practice :_ Ask Ss to look at 8 places in the box and the street map ._ Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about these places ._ Call some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class .

_ Correct the mistakes if necessary .4.Production :_Ask Ss to look at the street map again .

_ Explain the aims of the exercise to Ss : Listen to the directions then find out the places ._ Make model :

12’

8’

_ Look at 8 places in the box and the street map ._ Work in pairs .

_Practice in front of the class S1 :Where is the police station ?S2: The police station is between the post office and museum . It’s opposite the stadium .S1: Where is the shoe store ?S2: The shoe store is between the restaurant and the hotel . It’s opposite the supermarket

_ Look at the street map again ._ Listen carefully .

_ Listen to the tape carefully _ Exchange the result with the partner ._ Listen to the tape then check the answer .


153


Go straight ahead to the third street , tunr right , what is between the movie theatre and the bakery ? It’s toystore ._ play the tape for Ss ( 2 or 3 times ) _ask them to exchange the results with their partners ._ Play the tape again for Ss to check the results _Correct the mistake then give the correct answers .a. Souvenir shop b. Shoe store c. Hotel d. Drugstore e. Hospital Give some places for Ss to practice :Restaurant / museum / book store _ Ask Ss to give the directions to these places .

_ Call on some Ss to give the directions in front of the class ._ Correct the mistake if necessary .5.Homework :_ Write the directions to 8 places in the box ._ Do exercises in BTBS ._Prepare part 4,5 .

5’

_ Write down .

_ Give the directions to these places ._ Give the directions in front of the class .

_ Write homework .


154


Period 48UNIT 8: PLACES Lesson 3 : B1- 4

A / Aims and Objectives 1. Ojectives : -By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to practice asking and

answering about distances between two places with “ How far …” 2. Teaching points: It takes + time + to get …….

How far is it from …….to …….?B / PrepairationS





T’s Activities Ss’ Activities 1. Warm up :- Greetings .- Have Ss play a game : Hangman ( 3 words )+ The first word has 6 letters . It is used for asking about distance .+ The second word has 5 letters . It is used for measuring distances . + The third word has 8 letters . It is also used for measuring distance.- Remark .

- Greetings. - Play a game : Hangman . + How far

+ meter


155


2. New activities :a. Listen and repeat . Then practice the

dialogue with the partner.-Introduce the aim of the lesson , then explain some new words and structures .+ A long way ( n )+ Have a guess + Coach ( n )+ It takes about 18 hours to get there by coach .- Ask Ss to look at the dialogue and listen to the tape .-Ask Ss some questions about distance using : how far is it from……….to…………?Example :How far is it from your house to school ?How far is it from Nam Dinh to Ha Noi ?- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and read

after the tape .- Have Ss work in pairs reading the

dialogue .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .- Correct the pronunciation .- Ask Ss to answer the question :How far is it from Hue to Ho Chi Minh city ?How far is it from Hue to Ha noi ?b. Look at this table of distances in km . Ask

and answer questions with a partner.- Ask Ss to look at the map and the table in

the book carefully .

+ Kilometer

-Listen to the teacher carefully .

Guess the meanings , read new words in chorus and individually then copy down .

-Look at the dialogue and listen to the tape .-Answer T’s questions

It’s about one kilometer .It’s about 90 kilometers .-Listen to the tape and read after the tape .-Work in pairs reading the dialogue .-Practice in front of the class .

-Answer the question :It’s about 1,030 km.


156


- Make example :How far is it from Vinh to Hanoi ?It’s about 319 km _ Have Ss work in pairs asking and

answerring about the distances .- Call on some pairs to practice in front of

the class .- Correct the mistake if necessary . Ask Ss to

write down in the notebooks .3. Consolidation :* Ask Ss to practice in pairs , using the

street map about the stores and the table b in language focus 3 , then make a conversation about giving direction .- Make example : S1 : Could you tell me how to get to the

bookstore from the library ?S2 : Go straight ahead to the park , take the

first street on the left and go along Hue street . The bookstore is betweenthe minimart and the restaurant .S1 : How far is it from the library ?S2 : about 500 meters .S1 : thank you .S2 : You’re welcome .- Ask them to work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice in front of

the class.- Correct the mistake and ask them to write

down 4. Home work :- Do exercise 2 at page 48 in work book .

It’s about 680 km .

-Look at the map and the table carefully .-Listen carefully .

Work in pairs .

-Practice in front of the class.

-Write down .

-Listen carefully .

-Work in pairs .- Practice in front of the class .- Write down .

- Write homework .


157


- Prepare part B1

VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Period 49 UNIT 8: PLACES Lesson 4 : B2 - 3

A / Aims and Objectives 1. Ojectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to give the requirements . They will practice asking and answering about the price .

2. Teaching points: - I’d like to + V + …….. - How much does/ do + S + cost ?

- How much is / are + S ?B / PrepairationS





158



T’s Activities Ss’ Activities


159


1. Warm up : - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions such as : Where do you often buy stamps ? Which services are supply at the post office ?- Remark and lead in the new lesson .2. Presentation :- Ask Ss to look at the picture and introduce some services at the post office such as : sending letters , sending and receiving parcels , money , buying envelopes , stamps ….then explain some new words and structues :+ Envelope ( n ) : phong b× + To send ( v ) : göi + To mail ( v ) : göi th.+ To receive ( v ) : nhËn + change ( n ) : tiÒn lÎ, tiÒn thõa .+ Altogether ( adv ) : tæng céng * Checking technique : Slap the board .* Structures: + I’d like to + V ….+ How much is / are + S ?Example : I’ d like to send this letter to the USA ?How much is the shirt ? It’s 2,000 dong How much are these envelopes ? they are 5,000dong- Ask Ss to make sentences , using the structures .- Introduce the situation of the conversation

- Greetings .- Answer the questions ( Ss can answer the questions in Vietnamese )- Listen carefully .

- Look at the picture and listen carefully .

Guess the meanings , read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down .

- Play game : Slap the board .

- Make sentences with the structures - Listen to the teacher .


160


then ask Ss to do exercise . Exercice : T or F predictions a. Liz’d like to send the letter to great Britain

.b. She need some envelopes .c. They are 2,500 dong .d. The stamps for her letter cost 9,000

dong .e. The envelopes and the stamps are 11,500

dong .- Ask Ss to work in groups .- Call on some groups to give their predictions .3.Practice :- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then check the predictions .- call on some Ss to give the answers , correct and give the correct answers :a. F b. T c. F d. F e. T - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs .- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class.- Correct the pronunciation .- Ask Ss to look at the dialogue again to find out the answers for the questions in the book .- Have Ss play a game : lucky numbers (1) Where is your nearest post office ?( 2) LN(3) Where will Liz mail her letter to ?( 4) How much is the letter to the USA ?(5) How much are these envelopes Liz

- Work in groups . - Give the predictions

- Look at the book and listen to the tape then correct the predictions .- Give the answers

- Practice in pairs .- Practice in front of the class.

- Look at the dialogue again and find out the answers for the questions .

- Play a game in groups .- Answer the questions

- Write down .

- Write a passage .Ex: my nearest post office is about 500 meters from my house . I can get


161


needs ?(6) LN.(7) How much does Liz pay altogether ?(8) How much change does Liz have ?- Remark and ask Ss to write the answers in the notebooks .

4.Production :-Ask Ss to write a passage using the questions given + Where is your nearest post office ?+ How can you get there from your home ?+ What can you buy there ?+ Hwo much is it to mail a letter in Viet nam ?+ What else can you do at the post office ?- Go around class and provide help .- Call on some Ss to read their writing in front of the class .- Correct the mistake and remark .5. Homework :- Learn by heart new words and structures by write 2 lines for each word and make 3 sentences for each structure .- Do exercise 1 at page 50 in workbook .- Prepare part 2,3 .

there by bike . there I can buy envelopes , postcards , stamps. A letter in VN costs 800 dong . I can make a phone call there , too .

- Read the writing aloud .

- Write homework .

VI. Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………


162


Period 50 ConsolidationI.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will review the knowledge which they have learnt from unit 1 to unit 8 . From that they will aplly them to do the test well .II.Language content : Review : - The present progressive tense .

- The simple future tense III.Technique : Eliciting , asking and answering , pairwork .IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , sub- board , chalk .V. Procedure :

1. Warm up :- Greetings .- Chatting some questions with Ss .

2. Consolidation and practice :A. The present progressive tense :

- Ask Ss to give the form and use of the present progressive tense : Form: ( + ) S + am / is / are + V-ing . ( - ) S + am / is / are + not + V- ing . ( ? ) Am / is / are + S + v- ing ? Use : It is used to express an action which is happening at a time at present . It

usually goes with adverbs of time such as : now / at the moment / at present .Examples: She is listening to music at the moment . They are playing marbles in the yard now .


163


- Have Ss make sentences as model .B. The simple future tense :

- Have Ss give the form and the use in front of the class .* Form : ( + ) S + Will + V ( without To ) . ( - ) S + Will not + V ( without To ) ( ? ) Will + S + V ( without To ) ? Use : It is used to express an action or a plan which will happen in the future . It

usually goes with adverbs of time such as : Tomorrow , Next week / month / year …..

Example: She will go to Ha noi tomorrow . They will have a party next week .- Ask Ss to make sentences .

* Give the correct verbs in the brackets:1. She (meet)…will meet……………………. her old friends tonight.2. Mr, Johns ( get) gets…………………………. Seven public holidays each year .3. Mai loves ( play)……playing………………………….. the piano.4. Minh ( eat)………is eating……………………….. his breakfast now.5. You (have)……………………………… lots of friends soon.6. Students should (review)……review………………………. their work before tests.7. We always ( go)………go……………………. to Nha Trang on vacation.8. Look! The children (ride)……are riding………………………………. their bikes.9. She always ( go)....goes................... to school on weekdays.10. They(watch)...are watching.................... that film now.11. She (have)..is having................ breakfast at the moment.12. Hoa ( have) has.............. English on Mondays.VI. Homework_Learn by heart grammar ,do all exercises on notebooks- Review all the knowledge

4.Supplement:


164


……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Period 51 ConsolidationI.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will review the knowledge which they have learnt from unit 1 to unit 8 . From that they will aplly them to do the test well .II.Language content :

Review : - Comparative . - Asking and answering about distance . - Exclamation .

III.Technique : Eliciting , asking and answering , pairwork .IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , sub- board , chalk .V. Procedure :


4. Consolidation and practice :


165


C. Comparative :a) Short adjectives :

- Have Ss give the form :S1 + Tobe + adj + er + than + S2 .

EX: She is taller than me . This ruler is longer than that one .

- Have Ss make sentences in front of the class .b) Long adjectives :

_ Ask Ss to give the form : S1 + Tobe + more + adj + than + S2 .

EX: This pen is more expensive than that one . He is more inteligent than his brother . Especial cases : Good / well => better Bad / ill => Worse Many / much = > More Little => Less Far => Farther / further .

D. Asking answering about distances :- Ask Ss to give the structure about asking and answering the distances :

How far is it from……….to…………..?It’s about …………….km/m

EX: How far is it from your house to school ? It’s about 2 km . How far is it from NamDinh to Ha Noi ? It’s about 90 km .

- Have Ss work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .

E. Exclamations :What + a / an + ( adj ) + N !What + ( adj ) + Ns !

EX : What a nice picture !


166


What a cold day ! What naughty boys !

- Have Ss make sentences .5. Further practice :Exercise 2: Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given .a. She doesn’t have as many toys as I .=> She has …………………………………………………………………..b. There is less coffee in my cup than there is in your cup . => There is ……………………………………………………………………c. I don’t have so many friends as my sister . => I have …………………………………………………………………….d. My friends have more candies than I . => I don’t ……………………………………………………………………e. My brother drinks more coffee than my sister .=> My sister drinks ………………………………………………………….f. She eats more chocolate than I . => I eat ………………………………………………………………………g. She has less flour than he has .=> He has …………………………………………………………………….h. There are more students in my class than there are in her class .=> There are …………………………………………………………………i. There is less water in a dessert than there is in a mountain . => There isn’t ………………………………………………………………….j. There are fewer singers in a small city than there are in a big city . => There aren’t ……………………………………………………………………..6. Homework :

- Do exercises in the notebooks .- Review for doing the first semester test .

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………


167


.......................................................................................................................................

....................................Period 52 ConsolidationI.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will review the knowledge which they have learnt from unit 1 to unit 8 . From that they will aplly them to do the test well .II.Language content :

Review : - Adverbs of frequency . - Asking and answering about the price .

III.Technique : Eliciting , asking and answering , pairwork .IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , sub- board , chalk .V. Procedure :


8. Consolidation and practice :F. Adverbs of frequency :

Always / usually / often / sometimes / seldom / rarely / never ….- Ask Ss to say about the position of adverbs :

Ex : He always gets up at 5:00 in the morning . I am never late for school .

G. Asking and answering about the price : How much + is / are + S ? => S + is / are + ………. How much + does / do + S + cost ? => It/ They + costs / cost + ……..Ex : How much does this shirt cost ? => It costs 50,000 dong . How much are these envelopes ? => They are 2,000 dong .


168


9. Further practice :Exercise 3 : Choose the best anser .1. Hurry or you’ll be late ……………….school .

A. with B. for C. at 2. My homework ……………………about two hours each day .

A. takes B. has C. gives 3. Our summer vacation starts in june . It ……….almost two months .

A. happens B. takes C. lasts

4. What do you do ……………the vacation ?A. during B. while C. when

5. We have fun ……………together on the farm .A. working B. work C. to work

6. We don’t have classes on Saturday , but we work one hour ………..each day .A. more B. much C. many

7. Viet namese students have …………vacations than American ones .A. few B. fewest C. fewer

8. Many women work …….home .A. at B. in C. on

9. They take …………..of the house and look after the children .A. care B. homework C. notice

10. My brother always goes to bed early , but he …………..gets up early .A. not B. never C. ever

Exercise 4: Give the correct form of the adj/ adv in parentheses .1. This house isn’t very modern . I want a ( modern) ………………….one .2. That building is the ( high ) ……………..one in our town .3. Nam is a good tennis player . I think he is the ( good ) …………in the club .4. My bag isn’t very heavy . Your bag is ( heavy ) …………………..5. We don’t know many people . You know ( many )………………..people than us .6. It is a very bad film . It’s the ( bad ) ………….film I’ve ever seen .7. What is the ( long )……………….river in the world ?8. Tuan doesn’t work hard . I work ( hard )……………………


169


9. She doesn’t know much . Her sister knows much ( much )………………….10. They have little freetime but we have ( little )……………………….

V.Consolidation :Repeat all the structures which the students have reviewed .

VI.Homework :- Do exercises in the notebooks .- Review for doing the first semester test .

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

....................................................................................................................

.................................................... Period 53: ConsolidationI.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will review the knowledge which they have learnt from unit 1 to unit 8 . From that they will aplly them to do the test well .II.Language content :

Review : - Comparative . - Asking and answering about distance . - Exclamation . - Adverbs of frequency . - Asking and answering about the price . - Making suggestions . - Invitation. - Asking the way .

III.Technique : Eliciting , asking and answering , pairwork .IV. Teaching aids :


170


Textbook , sub- board , chalk .V. Procedure :


11. Consolidation and practice :H. Making suggestions :

- Let’s + V .- Should we + V ?- How about + V-ing ?- What about + V-ing ?- Why don’t we + V ? Agreement : OK / I’d love to /That’s a good idea . Disagreement : + I’m sorry , I can’t . + I’m sorry , I can’t . I’m busy . + I’d love to but I’m going to……… + Thanks anyway .EX : Let’s go to Lan’ house . Should we play table tennis ? What about going to the movies ? Why don’t we go to the beach ?

I. Invitation Would you like + N ?Would you like + to V ?EX : Would you like to go to the concert with me ? Would you like to come to my house for lunch ? Yes , I’d love to / Yes , please / All right . No, thanks / I’d love to but I’m busy .

J. Asking the way : - Is there ……near here ? / Where is …….?- Could you tell me how to get there ? - Could you show me the way to the ……..?


171


- How can I get there ? Go straight ahead / go long this street . Take the first / second street on the

left / right ./ Turn right / left .EX : Could you show me the way to the post office ?

Go straight ahead , Take the first street on the right . It is opposite the police station.

K. Buying things :I’d like + N Can I have a/ some + N , please ?I need to buy an English book , please ?

12. Further practice :Exercise 5 : Rearrange the words or phrases to make meaningfull sentences .1. To/ take/ often/ Mai /minutes / get/ her/ to /bus/ school /it / ten/ by .……………………………………………………………………………………2. House / is / it / Minh’s / far / to / apartment / how / from/ Lien’s ?………………………………………………………………………………….3. Younger / more / work / hours / my / sister / I / than .……………………………………………………………………………………4. Hotel / show / you / me / way / the / to / Bong Sen / Miss / could / the ?…………………………………………………………………………………….5. Clerk / would / I / like / fifty/ a / thousand / phone / dong / card .………………………………………………………………………………………6. Grow / farmers / some / but / main / their / crop / rice / is / the / vegetables .……………………………………………………………………………………….7. Please / show / me / you / way / the / to /station / nearest / could/ the / police ?………………………………………………………………………………………..8. By / me / it / about / takes / minutes / ten/ to / from / go / my / to / house / my /

factory/ bike / often / father’s .…………………………………………………………………………………………….9. Phone / stamps / would / some / for / Great Britain / a / card / clerk / I / like / and.


172


10. Loves / theatre / to / Chi/ going / join/ school/ group / she / acting / much/ is / the / because / very .

……………………………………………………………………………………………...13. Consolidation :

Repeat all the structures which the students have reviewed .14. Homework :

- Do exercises in the notebooks .- Review for doing the first semester test .

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

.....................................................................................................................................

..............Period 55 UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY

Lesson 1 : A- A holiday in Nha Trang ( A1 )A / Aims and Objectives

1. Ojectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be used to the past simple tense . They will know about some of the irregular verbs and regular verbs .

2. Teaching points The past simple tense .1.Teacher :Textbooks , chalks , boards …2. Students : books, notebooks..




T’s Activities Ss’ Activities 1. Warm up :


173


- Greetings .- Ask Ss some questions such as :+ Do you enjoy going on a picnic ?+ Where do you often go on summer vacations ?+ What do you usually do during the vacation ?+ Have you ever been to Nha Trang ?+ What do you think about Nha Trang ?- Remark and lead in the new lesson .

2. Presentation :- Ask Ss to look at the picture in the

book , then introduce the situation of the lesson .

- Explain some new words to Ss :+ Aquarium ( n ) :+ Gift ( n ) :+ Delicious ( adj ) :+ To be : was / were ( past ) + To have : had ( past )+ To take : took ( past )+ To go : went ( past )+ To buy : bought ( past ) + To talk : talked ( past )+ To return : returned ( past )+ To visit : visited ( past )- Have Ss read new words in chorus and

individually. Checking technique : matching

- Ask Ss to match the words with their meanings .

Gift Mua

- Greetings .- Answer the questions .

- Look at the picture and listen carefully .

- Listen and write down .+ Aquarium ( n ) :+ Gift ( n ) :+ Delicious ( adj ) :+ To be : was / were ( past ) + To have : had ( past )+ To take : took ( past )+ To go : went ( past )+ To buy : bought ( past ) + To talk : talked ( past )+ To return : returned ( past )+ To visit : visited ( past


174


Aquarium Ngon Took Mãn quµ Bought Cã Delicious Trë vÒ Went Hå c¸ Had Lay / cÇm Returned §i - Remark and give mark .- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to

the tape then answer the question : What places did Robinsons visit and what did they do there ?- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and repeat

after the tape .- Call on some Ss to give their answers .- Correct and give the correct answers :- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice in front

of the class .- Correct their pronunciation .- Introduce quickly the past simple tense

, then ask Ss to find out the sentences in the past .

- Ask them to read after the teacher these sentences and verbs .

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and number the sentences .

- Ask them to exchange the result with the partner .

- Call on some Ss to give the answer in front of the class .

- Remark and give the correct answer :

Guess the meaning , read new words in chorus and individually

- Do exercise : matching

One student goes to the board and match .

- Look at the book and listen to the tape .


175


1. Liz went to Nha Trang .2. Liz visited Tri Nguyen aquarium .3. Liz bought souvenirs .4. Liz returned to Ha noi .5. Liz talked to Ba about her vacation .

1. Practice :- Give some cues then ask Ss to practice

asking and answering .+ Vacation / wonderful + Food / delicious + Things / expensive + People / friendly + Nha Trang / beautiful - Call on some pairs to ask and answer

in front of the class .- EX: How was the vacation ? It was wonderful .

2. Production :- Have Ss play a game : Guessing game

3. Homework :- Learn by heart new words by writing 3

lines for each .- Do exercise 1 at page 53 in workbook .- Prepare A2.

- Listen to the tape and read after the tape .

- Give the answers .

- Work in pairs .- Practice reading in front of

the class .

- Listen carefully and find out the sentences in the past .

- Read after the teacher .

- Read the dialogue again and number the sentences .

- Exchange the result . - Give the answer in front of the class .

- Write down in the notebooks

-Practice asking and answering in pairs .-Practice in front of the class .

-Play game :EX: S1: Last vacation I was in ………S2: Were you in …………?S1: Yes, I was / No, I wasn’t .

- Write homework .


176


4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Preparing date : . 1.2015.Teaching date : . 1.2015.

UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAYPeriod 56 Lesson 2 : A- A holiday in Nha Trang ( A2,3 )A / Aims and Objectives

1. Ojectives : -Students read the passage for details about the Robinsons’ vacation and practice Wh- questions in the past simple tense .- They continue to practice reading skill.2. Teaching points The past simple tense .1.Teacher :Textbooks , chalks , boards …2. Students : books, notebooks..



2. Checking up: (passover) 3. New lesson(39’) T’s Activities Ss’ Activities 1. Warm up :

- Greetings .- Have Ss play a game : Palmanism :Go , have , went , talk , bought , had , take , took , talked .- Remark .

2.Pre- reading :

- Greetings .- Play a game in 2 groups .


177


- Introduce the lesson : In the last period , we heard Liz telling about her vacation in Nha trang with her family . In today’s lesson , we will read the text about one of the most interesting and memorable activities which Liz and her family did during the vacation – the visit to Tri Nguyen aquarium .

- Explain some new words to Ss. + Shark ( n ): + Dolphin ( n ) : + Turtle ( n ) : + Crab ( n ) : + Cap ( n ) : + Exit ( n ) : + To eat => ate ( past ) + To see => saw ( past ) + To wear => wore ( past ) + To think => thought ( past ) Checking technique : What and where

* Matching : Eat wore See thought Wear ate think saw

- Remark . Before reading the text , ask Ss to do

exercise : T or F prediction .a. The Robinsons went to TN aquarium .b. They saw many different types of fish .c. Liz bought a little turtle .

- Listen carefully .

- Listen and write down .

Guess the meanings , read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down .

- Play a game : what and where

- One student goes to the board and match .

- Listen then do exercise .


178


d. They had lunch at a food stall. e. Liz ate fish and crab .

- Ask Ss to discuss in groups .- Call on some groups to give their

predictions.3.While – reading :

- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then check their predictions .

- Call some Ss to give the answers .- Correct and give the correct answer :a. T b. T c. F d. T e. F - Have Ss read the text in front of the

class .- Correct the pronunciation .- Ask Ss to read the text again and find

out the answers for the questions .- Have Ss work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in

front of the class .- Correct and give the correct answers :a. Liz’s parents went to the aquarium with

her.b. They saw many different types of fish

….c. They bought a cap in the souvenir

shop .d. Yes, she did . She wore the cap all day .e. Yes, they do . Mr and Mrs Robinson ate

fish and crab .f. Because she remembered the beautiful

fish in the aquarium .4.Post – reading :

- Work in groups .- Give the predictions .

- Look at the book and listen to the tape and check the prediction .

- Read the text in front of the class.

- Read the text again and find out the answers .

- Work in pairs .- Practice asking and

answering in front of the class.

- Write down in the notebooks .

- Look at the pictures and retell the story .

- Some Ss go to the board and tell the story .


179


- Ask Ss to tell the story of Liz’s trip to TN aquarium , using the pictures .

- Call on some Ss to go to the board and tell thestory , using the pictures .

- Remark and give marks .5.Homework :

- Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each .

- Write the story about Liz’s trip .- Do exercise 2 at page 53 in workbook .

- Write homework .

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

......................................................................................................................................................................

UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAYPeriod 57 Lesson 3 : A- A holiday in Nha Trang ( A3,4 )A / Aims and Objectives

1. Ojectives : -The students will continue to learn about the past simple tense and know some more regular and irregular verbs .

-They continue practicing listening skill.



Good morning !


180


How are you today ?2. Checking up: (passover)

3. New lesson(39’) T’s Activities Ss’ Activities 1. Warm up :

- Greetings .- Have Ss play a game : Bingo + Ask Ss to write the verbs in the past simple tense .+ Read : Went , bought , had , took , talked , returned , visited , wore , ate , saw , thought .+ Remark .- Call one student to go to the board and

retell the story of Liz’s trip to Nha trang .

- Remark and give mark .2. Pre – listening .

- Introduce the situation of the listening , then ask Ss to read 5 pairs of sentences in the book .

- Explain some new words to Ss . + Unfortunately ( adv ) >< Fortunately ( adv )+ Peaceful ( adj ) :+ Calm ( adj ) :+ Roadside restaurant ( n ) :+ Peanuts ( n ) :+ To drive => drove ( past )

Checking technique : Rub out and remember .

- Ask Ss to read the sentences again and

- Greeings .- Play a game .Write the verbs in the past simple tense .

- One student goes to the board and retell the story .

- Listen to the teacher carefully and read the sentences .


Guess the meanings , read new words in chorus and individually, then copy down .

- Play a game : rub out and remember .

- Read the sentences then guess .

- Give the predictions .


181


guess which sentences they are going to hear .

- Call on some Ss to give their predictions .

3. While – listening :- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and check

their prediction .( 2 times )- Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Play the tape again and ask Ss to check

the answers.- Correct and give the correct answers . b, d , e , h , j

Exercise : Complete the passage .- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and

complete the passage .Liz was excited as the bus …1……..through the countryside . Everything …..2……. calm and peaceful. At 4 o’clock the bus …3…… at a small roadside restaurant . Mrs Robinson …..4…… some peanuts and an ice cream for Liz . The bus …5 . …. in Ha noi at about 7 p.m .

- Call some Ss to give the results which they have heard .

- Correct and give the correct answers :1. drove 2. looked 3. stopped 4. bought 5. arrived

4.Post – listening :- Have Ss work in pairs interviewing Liz

about her family’s trip back to Hanoi .EX: + How did you travel back to Hanoi ?

- Listen to the tape and check the predictions .

- Give the answers .- Listen to the tape again

and check the answers .- Listen and copy down .

- Listen to the tape and complete the passage .

- Give the answers .- Copy down .

- Work in pairs .



182


+What did you see on the way back ? +How did everything look ? +Were you tired ? +When did you arrive in Hanoi?

- Call on some pairs to role play in front of the class .

- Remark .5.Homework :

- Write a passage about Liz’s family’s trip back to Hanoi ( 8 to 10 sentences )

- Do exercise 3 at page 54 in workbook .- Prepare part 4 ,5 .

- Write homework .

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

.....................................................................................................................................

.................UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY

Period 58 Lesson 4 : B- Neighbors ( B1,2 )

A / Aims and Objectives 1. Ojectives : After the lesson , the students will practice the past simple

tense in negative and interrogative forms and short answers to talk about past activities .


C / Procedure


183


1. Ogernirations (1’)Good morning !How are you today ?



- Greetings .- Have Ss play a game : Pelmanism come , improve , wore , came , received , improved , receive , wear , teach , taught .- Demonstrate the group which is winer

.2. New activities :A. Listen . then practice with a partner .

- Ask Ss to look at the picture and guess what they are doing .

- Introduce : Lan and Hoa are friends . they are talking . Now you listen to the tape and tell me what they are talking about .

- Play the tape for Ss . - Explain some new words to Ss :+ Hairdresser ( n ):+ Dressmaker ( n ) :+ Neighbor ( n ) :+ Material ( n ) :+ To make ( v ) => made + To cut ( v ) => cut - Have Ss read new words in chorus

- Greetings .- Play a game : Pelmanism

- Look at the picture and guess .

- Listen to the teacher .

- Listen to the tape .- Listen and write down .

Guess meanings , read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down .

- Play a game : Rub out and remember .


184


and individually .* Checking technique : Rub out and remember .

- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again then answer the question .

- Correct and give the correct answer :They are talking about Hoa’s hair , dress .- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and read

after the tape .- Have Ss work in pairs reading the

dialogue.- Call on some pairs to practice the

dialogue in front of the class .- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and

find out the answers for the questions .

- Have Ss work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to ask and answer

in front of the class .- Correct and give the correct answers :a) She is a hairdresser .b) She is a dressmaker .

Answer :- Introduce the form of short answers .- Make model sentences : + Did Hoa buy the dress ? No, she didn’t . + Did her aunt cut her hair ? Yes , she did .- Ask Ss to practice in pairs using the

- Listen to the tape again , then answer the question .

- Read after the tape .

- Work in pairs .-Practice in front of the class.

- Read the dialogue again and find out the answers .


answering in front of the class .

- Copy down .

- Listen .- Listen and write down .

- Work in pairs .



185


information in the dialogue .- Call on some pairs to practice in front

of the class .- Remark .

3. Consolidation :_ repeat the form of short answer of the past simple tense .

- Have Ss play a game : Guessing game .

EX: Yesterday I went to a ……and I bought a/ an …..+ Did you go to ………..?+ Did you buy ………….?

- Remark .4. Homework :

- Learn by heart new words by making sentences with them .

- Do exercises 1,2 at page 55, 56 in workbook .

- Prepare part 3,4 .


- Play a game : Guessing game

Write the sentences in a paper sheet .

- Write homework .

UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAYPeriod 59 Lesson 5 : B- Neighbors ( B3,4 )

A / Aims and Objectives 1. Ojectives -By the end of the lesson , Ss will read the text for details to

understand Hoa’s sewing work and further practice in WH- questions to talk about past activities .

-Practice reading and writing skills .


186





2. Checking up: (passover) 3. New lesson(39’) T’s Activities Ss’Activities 1. Warm up :

- Greetings .- Ask Ss some questions :+ What did you do lastnight ?+ Did you watch TV ?+ Did you do your homework ?+ What time did you go to bed ?…………….- Remark .

2.New activities :A. Read . Then answer .

- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words :

+ Hobby ( n ) :+ Sewing machine ( n ) :+ Cushion ( n ) :+ Useful ( adj ) :+ To sew ( v ) :+ To decide ( v ) => decided ( past ) + To try (v ) => tried ( past ) + To fit ( v ) => fitted ( past )- Have Ss read new words in chorus and


- Listen then write down .

Guess the meaning , read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down .


187


individually .- Correct their pronunciation .

Checking technique : What and where . Exercise : T or F prediction .1) Hoa decided to learn how to sew .2) She didn’t buy some material.3) She made a cushion for her armchair .4) Next, She made a shirt .5) It was blue with white flowers on it .

- Have Ss do exercise in groups - Call on some groups to give their

predictions - Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to

the tape and check their predictions .- Call on some Ss to give the results .- Correct and give the correct answers :1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. F - Call on some Ss to read the passage

aloud .- Ask Ss to read the passage again and

find out the answers for the questions .- Have Ss work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to ask and answer

in front of the class .- Correct and give the correct answers

a) She learned how to use a sewing machine .b) She made a cushion for her armchair first .c) It was blue and white .d) Next , she made a skirt .e) It was green with white flowers on it .f) It looked very pretty .g) She tried it on but it didn’t fit .

- Play a game : what and where .

- Work in groups .- Give the predictions .- Listen to the tape and

check the predictions .- Give the results .

- Read the passage aloud .- Read the passage again

and find out the answers - Work in pairs .- Practice asking and


- Copy down .


188


h) Hoa’s neighbor helped her .i) Finally, It fitted very well.B. Write . Put the verbs in brackets in the

simple past tense .- Introduce the aim of the exercise to

Ss .- Ask Ss to read the sentences .- Ask them to complete the sentences

with the form of the verbs in the past simple tense .

- Have Ss exchange the results with the partners .

- Call on some Ss to go to the board and write down .

- Correct and give the correct answer :Watched – bought – cut – used – decided – was – made – was – wasn’t – helped – fitted 3.Consolidation:

- Repeat the form of Wh- questions :Wh- + did + S + Verb….?EX: Where did you buy this shirt ? I bought it in the shop . What did you do lastnight ? I watched TV .- Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and

answering using Wh – questions .- Remark .

4.Homework :- Learn by heart part remember by

making sentences with them .- Do exercise 3,4 at page 56,57 in

- Listen to the teacher .- Read the sentences in

the book .- Complete the sentences .- Exchange the results

with the partner.- Go to the board and write

down .- Copy down .

- Listen to the teacher carefully .

- Work in pairs asking answering using wh- questions to talk about past activities .

- Write homework .


189


workbook .- Prepare language focus .

Period 60: LANGUAGE FOCUS 3A / Aims and Objectives

1. Ojectives -By the end of the lesson , Ss will practice the past simple tense , prepositions of places , “ How much “ “ How far “ to talk about the price and distance , comparatives with more , less and fewer

2. Teaching points - The past simple tense .- How much is it ?- Prepositions of places .- Comparatives .




2. Checking up: (passover) 3. New lesson(39’) T’s Activities Ss’ Activities 1. Warm up :

- Greetings .- Ask Ss some questions about what

they did lastweek .EX : What did you do last weekend ? Did you go to the library ? Did you visit you grandparents ?


- Read the dialogue in pairs.


190


………….2. Consolidation and practice :A. How much is it ?a) Work with a partner . Read the dialogue .

- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs .- Ask ss to repeat the structure to ask

and answer about the price .-

Ex : How much is the green dress? = How much does the green dress cost ?b) Now make similar dialogues .

- Ask Ss to use the information in the table to make similar dialogues .

- Have Ss work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice in front

of the class.- Correct the mistake .

2) Prepositions :- Have Ss give the prepositions of

places .- Ask Ss to look at the map . Write the

location of each store .EX: The clothing store is on Hai Ba trung street . It’s near the shoe store to the right .

- Give the structure asking answering the price :

+ How much is/ are + S ? It/ They + is / are +….+ How much + do / does + S + cost ?=> It costs / They cost …..- Make similar dialogues .

- Work in pairs .- Practice in front of the

class.S1: How much is the blue hat ?S2: It’s 15,000dong .S1: What about the yellow hat ?S2: It’s 12,000 dong .

- Give the prepositions of places.

- Write the location of each store .

- Read the location of the stores.+ The bookstore is on Hue street. It’s between the restaurant and the minimart .……….

- Give the structure of asking and answering the distance .:

How far is it from……to…….?It’s about ……..


191


- Call some Ss to say about the location of the stores.

- Remark .- Call one student to give the structure

of asking and answering the distance .- Ask Ss to use the information in the

table to work in pairs : one asks and one answers .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.

3) Past simple tense :a) Write the past form of the verbs .-Ask Ss to write the past form of the verbs .

- Call on one student to go to the board and write down .

- Correct and give the correct answer :+ Buy => bought + help => helped + Remember => remembered + take => took + send => sent think => thought talk => talked

b) Complete the sentences . Use the words in the box .

- Ask Ss to use the words in the box to complete the sentences .

- Call on some Ss to do exercise .- Correct and give the correct answers :1) Played 2) Talked3) bought

- Work in pairs .

- Practice in front of the class.S1: How far is it from the shoe store to the minimart ?S2: It’s 500 meters .S1: How far is it from the clothing store to the bookstore ?S2: It’s 450 meters .……………….

- Write past form of the verbs .

- Write on the board .- Write in the notebook .

-Complete the sentences with the given words .

- Do exercise in front of the class.

- Write down .

-Complete the dialogue.

- Work in pairs .

- Role play in front of the class .


192


4) Worked5) Sent - Ask Ss to write down .

4) Simple tenses :- Have Ss to look at Nga’s diary then

complete the dialogue .- Have Ss work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to role play in front

of theclass .- Correct the mistake and give the key :

Nga: Everyday I clean my room , help my mom and study English .Minh : What did you do yesterday ?Nga : I cleaned my room, helped my mom, studied E , watched TV , played volleyball and stayed at Hoa’s house.Minh: How about tomorrow?Nga : I’ll study E, clean my room, help my mom, see a movie, visit my grandmother and buy new shoes .5)More , less , fewer .

- Ask Ss to repeat the use of more , less and fewer .

- Ask Ss to look at the two refregerators and write sentences , using more , less and fewer .

- Call on some Ss to go to the board and write down .

- Correct and give the correct answers :+ Before there were more bananas , Now there are fewer bananas .+ Before there was more milk . Now there

Repeat the use of more, less and fewer .

- Look at two refregeratos and write sentences .

- Go to the board and write down .

- Copy down .

- Do test yourself 3 .


- Write homework .


193


was less milk .3.Further practice :

- Have Ss do test yourself in workbook. 4.Consolidation :

- Repeat the structures which Ss have learnt .

5. Homework :- Redo all exercises in the exercise

book .- Prepare part A1- unit 10.

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Period 61 UNIT 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 1: A- Personal hygiene (A1,4)I.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will read a letter to understand the details about Hoa and her family . they will cotinue to practice the simple present and the simple past tenses .II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary :


194


- Harvest - To take morning exercises - Helpful - To iron - To hope - Probably 2.Grammar :

- The simple present tense - The simple past tense .

III.Technique : Brainstorming , explanation , pairwork , groupwork .IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , player, projector , picture.V. Procedure :


- Greetings .- Brainstorming : Likes…..

Class….

From….

Lives with….. Live in…..

- Ask Ss to discuss about Hoa in groups .- Call on 2 groups to demonstrate their

discussion in front of the class .- Remark and lead in new lesson .

2.New activities :

- Greetings .

Work in groups .

- Demonstrate the discussion .



195

HOA


- Introduce the lesson then explain some new words :

+ Harvest ( n ):+ Helpful ( adj ) :+ To take morning exercises :+ To hope ( v ):+ To iron ( v ):+ Probably ( adv ) :- Have Ss read new words in chorus and

individually .- Correct their pronunciation .- Have Ss play a game : what and where

in order to check new words .- Ask Ss to order the sentences of Hoa’s

mom’s letter .a. Your dad and I hope you’re fine .b. I hope you’re taking care of yourself .c. I received a letter from your aunt last week .d. I miss you a lot .e. Don’t forget to write .f. Your grand father talks about you a lot .

- Call some Ss to give their predictions .- Ask Ss to look at the letter and listen to

the tape , then check their predictions .- Call some Ss to give the answers .- Correct and give the correct answers :1- a 2- f 3- c 4- b 5- d 6- e- Call on some Ss to read the letter in

front of the class .- Correct their pronunciation .- Ask Ss to read the letter again then find

out the answers for the questions in the

Guess the meanings , read new words in chorus and individually the copy down in the notebook .+ Harvest ( n ):+ Helpful ( adj ) :+ To take morning exercises :+ To hope ( v ):+ To iron ( v ):+ Probably ( adv ) :

- Play a gmae .

- Order the sentences .

- Give their predictions .- Look at the book and

listen to the tape , then check the predictions .



196


book .- Have Ss work in pairs .

Have Ss play a game called lucky numbers :1) Who helps Hoa’s parents on the farm ?2) LN3) What does Hoa’s mother want her to do?4) Why are Hoa’s parents busy ?5) LN 6) What does Hoa’s mother want her not to

do ?7) How is Hoa different now ?8) When will they go to Hanoi ?

- Remark and ask Ss to write the answers in the notebooks .

3.Consolidation:- Ask Ss to imagine they are Hoa . Write a

letter to her mother .- Go around the class and provide the

help - Have Ss exchange the letter with their

partners .- Call on some Ss to read their letters in

front of the class .- Correct the common mistakes .- Remark .

4.Homework :- Learn by heart new words by writing 3

lines for each .- Rewrite the letter in the exercisebook .- Do exercise 1 at page 61 in workbook .- Prepare part 2.

_ Read the letter aloud .

- Read the letter again to find out the answers for the questions .

- Work in pairs .

Play a game : lucky numbers .( Answer the questions )

- Write the answers in the notebooks .

- Write a letter to Hoa’s mother .

- Exchange the letter with the partner .

- Read the letters in front of the class .

- Write homework .


197


4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

.....................................................................................................................................

.................................Period 62 UNIT 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 2: A- Personal hygiene (A2,3)I.The aims : The students continue to practice about personal hygiene through the listening and reading the diary . Practice listening and speaking skills .II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - To polish - To comb - To change - Sandals - Pants - To drink => drank 2.Grammar : Review the past simple tense III.Technique : Eliciting , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork .IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .V.Procedure :



198

D Z S E N T E XI K A J C B D GD O W C K A A


- Greetings .- Have Ss play a game : Wordsquare .

-Ask Ss to find the past tense of irregular verbs - Remark .

2.New Activities :A. Listen : Pre- listening :

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures then introduce the aim of the lesson to Ss .

- Explain some new words to Ss .+ To polish ( v ) :+ To change ( v ):+ To comb ( v ) :+ Pants ( n ) :+ Sandals ( n ) :+ To drink ( v ) => drank ( past ) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and

individually .- Ask Ss to predict the order of the

pictures .- Call on some Ss to give their predictions

. While- listening :

- Play the tape for Ss and ask them to

- Greetings .- Play a game .- 2 groups take part in

the game . Went, came , ate ,

saw , gave , did , took , made , was , bought , were , sent , cut , won , had .

- Look at the pictures carefully and listen to the teacher .

Guess meanings , read new words in chorus and imdividually then copy down .

- Predict the order of the pictures .

- Give the predictions .- Listen to the tape and

check the predictions .- Give the answers .


199


check their predictions . ( 2 times )- Call on some Ss to give the answers .- Play the tape again and check .- Correct and give the correct answers :

1. a 2.e 3. f 4. d 5. g 6. c 7. h 8. b Post – listening :

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and tell what Hoa did yesterday .

EX: Yesterday , Hoa got up, she took a shower and put on her clothes ……….

- Call on some Ss to tell what Hoa did yesterday in front of the class .

- Correct the mistakes if necessary .B. Read Nam’s diary .

- Ask Ss to look at Nam’s diary and tell about Nam’s daily routines .

- Call on one student to read Nam’s diary .

- Have Ss work in pairs asking answering about Nam’s daily routines .

- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class .

- Ask them to write a diary about themselves based on Nam’s diary .

- Ask them to exchange their writing with the partner .

- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about themselves .

- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class.

- Remark .

- Listen to the tape again and check the answers .

- Copy down .

- Look at the pictures and tell what Hoa did yesterday .

- Some Ss tell about Hoa in front of the class .

- Read Nam’s diary .


class.

- Write a diary based on Nam’s .

- Exchange the writing with the partner .

- Work in pairs .


- Write about yesterday’s activities .


200


3.Consolidation :- Ask Ss to write about what they did

yesterday .- Call on some Ss to read their writing in

front of the class.- Remark .

4.Homework :- Write a passage about Hoa’s activites

using the pictures in the book .- Do exercise 3 at page 62 in workbook .- Prepare part 4 .

- Read the writing in front of the class .

- Write homework .

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………Period 63 UNIT 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 4: B- A bad tooth ache (B1)I.The aims : After the lesson , Ss will be able to tell about a visit to the dentist . They will be used to asking and answering about this topic .II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Dentist - To fill - Appointment - To hate - Drill - To hurt - Cavity - Scared 2.Grammar :

- The simple present and past tense - What’s the matter ? = What’s wrong ?


201


III.Technique : Explanation , eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , player, speaker, picture .V Procedure :


- Greetings .- Have Ss play a game : Hangman

Matter , Worry , tooth , Feel - Remark .

2.New activities :- Ask Ss some questions such as :+ What will you do if you have a tooth ache?+ When you go to the dentist , what will the dentist do ?- Ask Ss to look at the picture and

answer the question : What’s the matter with Minh , the boy in the picture ?

- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words to Ss .

+ Dentist ( n ) :+ An appointment ( n ) :+ Scared ( adj ) :+ Cavity ( n ) :+ To fill ( v ) :+ To hate ( v ) = to dislike ( v )+ To hurt ( v ) :+ Drill ( n ) :

- Greetings .- Play a game .

- Answer the questions .

- Look at the picture then answer the questions .

- Listen and write down .+ Dentist ( n ) :+ An appointment ( n ) :+ Scared ( adj ) :+ Cavity ( n ) :+ To fill ( v ) :+ To hate ( v ) = to dislike ( v )+ To hurt ( v ) :+ Drill ( n ) :


202


- Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually .

* Checking technique : Slap the board .- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and answer

the questions :+ What is Minh going to do at 10:30 ?+What happened to Hoa last week ?+ How did the doctor help Hoa ?- Play the tape for Ss .- Play the tape again and ask Ss to read

after the tape .- Ask Ss to answer the questions above .- Correct and give the correct answers .- Have Ss work in pairs reading the

dialogue .- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue

in front of the class .- Correct their pronunciation .- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and

find out the answers for the questions .- Have Ss work in pairs asking and

answering the questions .- Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers

1.Why did Hoa go to the dentist last week ?2What is wrong with Minh ?3.LN 4.Does Minh like going to the dentist ?

How do you know ?5.Are you scared of seeing the dentist ?6.LN 7.What did the dentist do with Hoa’s toothache ?

- Play a game : Slap the board .

- Two groups take part in the game .

- Listen to the tape , then find the answers .

- Listen to the tape .- Read after the tape .

- Answer the questions .- Listen .- Work in pairs .


- Read the dialogue again and find out the answers .

- Work in pairs .- Play a game in groups .

Answer the questions .


203


8.What did you do the last time you had a bad toothache ?9.LN 10.How does Minh feel after talking with Hoa ?

- Demonstrate the result .- remark .- Ask Ss to write the answers in the

notebooks .4.Homework :


- Do exercise 1 at page 63 in workbook .- Prepare part B2,3 .

Ask and asnwer in front of the class .EX : S1: Do you have a toothache ? S2 : Yes / No S1 : Do you like going to the dentist ?Remark

- Write homework .

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Period 64 UNIT 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 5: B- A bad tooth ache (B2,3)


204


I.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about Dr Lai’s job . They continue to practice about the topic of toothache . Practice listening and reading skills .II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - To explain - To remind - Sensibly - Surgery - To smile - To check

- To notice 2.Grammar : Review : the simple present tense III.Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , sub- board .V. Procedure : T’s Activities Ss’ Activities 1. Warm up :

- Greetings .- Have Ss play a game : Slap the board

2.New activities :a) Listen and answer

- Introduce the situation of the listening .- Ask Ss to read the questions in the

book then guess the answers for the questions .

- Call on some groups to give their

- Greetings .- Play a game .- Two groups take part in

the game .

- Listen to the teacher .- Read the questions in the

book and guess the answers ( work in groups)

- Give the predictions .- Listen and check the

predictions .- Listen and write down .


205

Dentist

Scared

Toothache

Appointment Hurt Cavity


answers.- Play the tape for Ss checking their

predictions .- Explain some new words to Ss.+ To explain ( v ) :+ To remind ( v ) :+ Sensibly ( adv ) :+ Surgrey ( n ) :+ To smile ( v ) :+ To notice ( v ) :+ Serious ( adj ) :- Have Ss read new words in chorus and

individually .- Play the tape again for Ss.- Ask Ss to give the answers .- Play the tape again for Ss checking the

answers .- Correct and give the correct answers .

a. Dr Lai is a dentist .b. She wears uniform to work .c. Most children feel scared when they come

to see Dr Lai .d. She explains what will happen. She gives

them advice .- Ask Ss to write down .

b) Listen and read .- Ask Ss to look at the picture and

answer the questions :+ What is the matter with Minh ?+ How does he feel ?+ What is the doctor doing ?+ Why does that happen to Minh ?

Read new words in chorus and individually , guess meaning then copy down .

+ To explain ( v ) :+ To remind ( v ) :+ Sensibly ( adv ) :+ Surgrey ( n ) :+ To smile ( v ) :+ To notice ( v ) :+ Serious ( adj ) :

- Listen to the tape to check the predictions .

- Give the answers .- Check the answers .- Write the answers in the

notebooks .

- Look at the picture and answer the questions .

- Give the answers .- Look at the book and

listen to the tape .


206


- Call on some Ss to give their answers .- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to

the tape ( two times ) - Have Ss read the text in silent .- Call on some Ss to read the text in

front of the class .- Ask Ss to complete the story with

suitable words .- Have Ss exchange the results with

their partners .- Call on some Ss to give the answers in

front of the class .- Correct the mistakes then give the

answer key :Minh is very nervous and Dr Lai notices this . She smiles to Minh and tells him not to worry . She explains one of his teeth has a cavity . He has to brush them regularly . After Dr Lai fills his tooth , Minh leaves . He is very pleased

- Call on some Ss to read the completed the story aloud .

2. Consolidation :Repeat the content of the lesson .3. Homework :


- Do exercises 2,3 at page 65 in workbook .

- Prepare part 4,5 .

- Read the text in silent .- Read the text aloud .

- Complete the story with the suitable words .

- Exchange the result with the partner .

- Give the answers in front of the class .


- Read the story aloud .


- Write homework .

4.Supplement:


207


……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Period 65 UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGYIENE Lesson 6 : B- A bad tooth ache (B 4) I.The aims : The students continue to practice speaking about health and hygiene , using simple present tense .II. Language content :

- Practice vocabulary about health and hygiene .- The present simple tense .

III.Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , using pictures .IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , pictures , V.Procedure


- Greetings .- Have Ss play a game : Networks

- Greetings .- Play a game - 2 groups take part in the

game .


208

Health and hygiene


Take morning exercises- Call on students from 2 groups to go to

the board and write down .- Remark.

2.New activities :a) Ask and answer qurstions with a partner .

Use the words to help you .- Ask Ss to tell what happenned to

Minh .- Introduce the way to make sentence

and the question : why and the answer to Ss .

- Make example : Minh’s tooth hurts .Why ?Because he has a cavity .- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and model then work in pairs asking and answering based on the pictures and the words given .- Call on some pairs to ask and answer

in front of the class .- Correct the mistake and give the

correct answer .a. Minh is nervous .

Why ?Because he is seeing the dentist .

b. the cavity is not serious .Why ?

- Go to the board and write down .

- Tell what happened to Minh .


- Work in pairs .


.- Listen and write down .

Minh is nervous .Why ?Because he is seeing the dentist .

the cavity is not serious .Why ?


209


Because it is small.c. Minh is happy .

Why ?Because his teeth are OK.

d. Minh’s tooth hurts .Why ?Because he has a cavity .

3.Consolidation :4. Homework :

- Write the poster : what should we do and shouldn’t do if we have healthy teeth ?

- Do exercise 4 at page 65 in workbook .- Prepare unit 11 – A1

Because it is small.Minh is happy .

Why ?Because his teeth are OK.

Minh’s tooth hurts .Why ?Because he has a cavity .


- Write homework .

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………Period 66 UNIT 11: KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY. Lesson 1 : A- A check – up (A1)I.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the content of the dialogue and give the requests and the reponses .II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary :

- Medical check – up - To measure - Medical record - To weigh - Height - Weight - Temperature - To take one’s temperature - Scales - Normal


210


2.Grammar : - The structure : Would you + V ? - Review the simple present tense III.Technique : Explanation, using pictures , pairwork , groupwork .IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .V.Procedure :


- Greetings .- Ask Ss some questions such as :+ Do you eat much candy ?+ Do you often eat ice- creams?+ How often do you brush your teeth ?+ If you have healthy teeth , what should you do ?- Remark and lead in new lesson .

2. New activities:- Ask Ss to look at the picture and

guess : Where are they ?What are they doing ?

- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words to Ss .

+ Medical check- up ( n ) :+ Medical record ( n ) :+ Height ( n ) :+ To measure ( v ) :+ To weigh ( v ) :+ Temperrature ( n ) :+ To take one’s temperrature


- Look at the picture and answer the questions .


read new words in chorus and individually , guess the meanings , then copy down .


211


+ Scales ( n ) :+ Normal ( adj ) :+ Structure : Would you open your mouth , please ? Would you + V ?- Have Ss read new words in chorus

and individually . Checking technique : Rub out and

remember .

- Have Ss guess the content of the dialogue and order the sentences .

- Call on some Ss to give their predictions in front of the class .

- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape then check their order .

- Ask them to read the dialogue again and give the answers .

- Correct and give the correct answers :1.F 2.D 3. C 4. G 5. E 6. A 7. H 8. B - Ask Ss to write the correct answer in the notebooks.

- - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue .

- Call on some pairs to practice reading in front of the class .

- Correct their pronunciation . Comprehension questions :-Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers 1. What were the students of QT school doing

?2. LN

- Play a game : rub out and remember .

- Guess the order of the sentences .

- Give the predictions in front of the class .

- Look at the books and listen to the tape .

- Read the dialogue and check the predictions .

- Write the correct answers .

- Work in pairs .


- Play a game :


212


3. Who was doing the medical check – up ?4. What did the nurse do ?5. LN 6. What was Hoa’s temperature ? Was it

normal?7. What was her height ?8. What was her weight ? How heavy was she

?- Remark .

3.Consolidation :- Ask Ss to use the structure : Would you + V ?to make the sentences

- Remark .4.Homework:


- Do exercise 1,2 at page 66 in workbook .

- Prepare part 2, 3 .

Answer the questions

2 groups take part in the game .

Would you open your mouth , please ?

Make sentences with the cues . - Write homework .

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………


213


Period 67 UNIT 11: KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY Lesson 2: A- A check – up (A 2 , 3)I.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information .II. Language content :1. Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female 2. Grammar :

The simple present tense .Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ?

III.Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , casstte .V.Procedure :


- Greetings .- Have Ss play a game : Slap the board

- Greetings .- Play a game : Slap the

board .



214

Normal Medical record

Medical check up Measur

eHeight Weigh Scale

s


- Demonstrate the group which wins the game .

2.New activities :A. Listen . Then write the missing words .

- Introduce the situation of the lesson .- Ask Ss to read the dialogue and guess

the missing words .- Have Ss listen to the tape for the first

time.- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and

find out the words to fill in the blanks .- Ask Ss to exchange the results with the

partners .- Call on some Ss to give the answers in

front of the class .- Have Ss listen to the tape again and

check their answers .- Correct and give the correct answers .

Doctor : I want to ask you a few questions before I start, Hoa . How old are you ?Hoa : Fourteen .Doctor : And your height is one meter 50 centimeters ?Hoa : No. I think I’m shorter . The nurse measured me . Doctor : Oh . How tall are you ?Hoa : One meter 45 centimeters .Doctor : I will ask the nurse to check your height again . How heavy are you ?Hoa : I think I’m 42 kilograms .

- Clap the hands .


- Read the dialogue and guess the missing words .

- Listen to the tape carefully .



- Listen to the tape again and check the answers .

- Listen and copy down .

Doctor : I want to ask you a few questions before I start, Hoa . How old are you ?Hoa : Fourteen .Doctor : And your height is one meter 50 centimeters ?Hoa : No. I think I’m shorter . The nurse measured me . Doctor : Oh . How tall are you ?Hoa : One meter 45 centimeters .Doctor : I will ask the nurse to check your height again . How


215


Doctor : No. It says on your form that you’re 40 kilograms .

- Ask Ss to practice the dialogue with the partner .

- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of the class .

- Correct their pronunciation .B. Ask and answer questions with a partner .

- Introduce the situation of the exercise to Ss and explain some questions :

+ Which school does he go to ?+ What is his surname ?+ How tall is he ? = What’s his height ?+ What’s his weight ? = How heavy is he ?- Ask Ss to work in pairs : One is A , the

other is B asking and asnwering the information to complete the medical record .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .

- Correct the mistakes if necessary .- Ask Ss to complete the form in their

notebooks .4.Homework :


- Prepare part B1 .

heavy are you ?Hoa : I think I’m 42 kilograms .Doctor : No. It says on your form that you’re 40 kilograms .

- Work in pairs reading the dialogue .

- Practice the dialogue in front of the class .

- Listen to the teacher and write down .

+ Which school does he go to ?+ What is his surname ?+ How tall is he ? = What’s his height ?+ What’s his weight ? = How heavy is he ?

Work in pairs .- Some pairs pratice in front

of the class .- Complete the form in the

notebooks- Practice in front of the

class.

- Write homework .


216


4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Period : 68 UNIT 11: KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY Lesson 3: B – What was wrong with you ? (B1)I.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to ask and asnwer questios about sickness and further practice in the past simple , question forms and negative forms .II. Language content :1. Vocabulary : - Bad cold - Sick note - Headache - Virus - Stomachache - Flu 2. Grammar :

- The simple past tense : question forms and negative forms .- Structures : What is/ was wrong with SB ? I have/ had a headache .


217


She has / had a bad cold .III.Technique : Explanation , eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .V.Procedure :


- Greetings .- Ask Ss some questions about

themselves .EX: How tall are you ? What’ s your weight ? How old are you ? ……………..

- Remark and give marks .2.Presentation :

- Introduce the situation of the lesson the explain some new words and structures :

+ To have a bad cold : a headache . a virus . flu . a stomachache .+ To be sick = to be ill .+ Sick note ( n ) : Have Ss play a game

Structures : What is / was wrong with SB ?EX: What was wrong with you ? I had a headache .

- Greetings .- Answer T’s questions .

- Listen to the teacher and copy down .

Read new words in chorus and individually , guess meanings then copy down .

- Make sentences :What was wrong with her ?She had a bad cold .


218


3.Practice :- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and

answer the questions :+ Look at balloon 1 : Lan wasnot there . She was absent . What do you think Mr. Tan is asking Lan? What was wrong with her ? ( look at balloon 2 ) - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and answer

the questions .- Call on some Ss to answer the

questions in front of the class .- Have Ss listen to the tape and look at

the books then check the answers.

- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of the class.

- Correct their pronunciation.- Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and

answering the questions in the books .- Call on some pairs to ask and answer

the questions in front of the class .- Correct the mistake and give the

correct answers :a) Lan didn’t go to school yesterday because

she had a bad cold .b) She had a headache .c) Mr. Tan tells Lan to stay inside at recess .d) The doctor said that Lan had a virus .e) The doctor wrote Lan’s sick note .

- Ask Ss to copy down .

- Look at the pictures and answer the questions .

- Read the dialogue in silent to find out the answers .


- Listen to the tape and check the answers .


- Practice reading the dialogue in front of the class .



- Copy down .

f) Lan didn’t go to school yesterday because she had a bad cold .

g) She had a headache .h) Mr. Tan tells Lan to stay inside

at recess .i) The doctor said that Lan had a


219


4.Production :- Give some cues and ask Ss to practice

in pairs .You / a cold . She / toothache .Lan / headache . He / flu .Ba / Stomachache .Make example :S1 : What was wrong with you ? S2: I had a cold .- Have Ss work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to ask and answer

in front of the class .- Remark .


lines for each .- Do exercise 1,2 at page 71 in

workbook .- Prepare part 2,3 .

virus .j) The doctor wrote Lan’s sick note

.- Ask Ss to copy down .- Work in pairs

- Listen .


class.

Write homework .

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………************************************************************************

Period 69 UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY Lesson 4 : B- What was wrong with you ? ( B 2 )


220


I . The aims : The students continue to review vocabulary about the common illness, they listen to the tape for specific information . Practice listening and speaking skills .II. Language content :

- Review vocabulary about the common illness .- The simple past tense .

III.Technique : Eliciting , Pairwork , groupwork . IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , sub- board .V.Procedure :



- Demonstrate the group which wins the game .

2.New activities :A. Take a survey

- Introduce the aim of the exercise .- Ask Ss to work in groups of four and

ask them to choose a secretary for their group.

- Greetings .- Play a game : Networks


- Listen to the teacher .- Work in groups .


221

Common illness


- Have Ss use the table B2 to take a survey

EX: Were you absent from school last semester ?Did you have a cold ? a stomachache ? the flu ? a toothache ?-Ask the secretaries to give the results of their groups .- Combine the result for the whole

class .- Ask Ss to answer the questions :

What was the most common illness?What was the least common illness?

- Remark .3.Consolidation :

- Ask some Ss to report in front of the class .

EX: Last semester in class 7A , cold caused 10 days’ absence but in my class cold caused 7 days’absence …….


- Write the comparation in the notebooks .

- Do exercise 3 at page 71 in workbook .

- Prepare part 4 .

- Take a survey .

- Give the results of the groups .


- Copy the answer in the notebooks .

- Some Ss report in front of the class .

- Write homework .

4.Supplement:


222


……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Period 70

UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY Lesson 5 : B – What was wrong with you ?( B4 )I.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the symptoms of the common cold and the cues to prevent it . Practice readind skill.II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Disease - Symptom - Runny nose - Slight fever - To cough - To sneeze - To prevent - To relieve - Cure => to cure - To disappear 2.Grammar : The simple present tense III.Technique : Explanation , eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , picture .V.Procedure : T’s Activities Ss’ Activities 1. Warm up :

- Greetings . - Greetings .


223


- Have Ss play a game : Guessing game - Ask Ss to write a disease which they

caught last time in a paper sheet .- Have one student go to the board and

others guess .- Remark , ask Ss some questions about

the disease they caught and lead in the new lesson .

2.Pre- reading :- Introduce the situation of the lesson ,

then explain some new words to Ss .+ Disease ( n ) : BÖnh + Symptom ( n ) : TriÖu chøng + Runny nose ( n ) : Sæ mòi + Slight fever ( n ) : Sèt nhÑ + To cough ( v ) : Ho + To sneeze ( v ) : H¾t h¬i + To relieve ( v ) : Lµm gi¶m+ To prevent ( v ) : Ng¨n ngõa+ To disappear ( v ) : BiÕn mÊt+ Cure ( n ) = > to cure : Ch÷a trÞ


- Have Ss play a game : rub out and remember in order to check new words .

- Have Ss work in groups discussing the questions :

+ Why do people call the cold “ common “?+ What are the symptoms of the common cold ?

- Play a game : guessing game .

- All class take part in the game .


Read new words in chorus and individually , then guess the meanings and copy down .

+ Disease ( n ) : BÖnh + Symptom ( n ) : TriÖu chøng + Runny nose ( n ) : Sæ mòi + Slight fever ( n ) : Sèt nhÑ + To cough ( v ) : Ho + To sneeze ( v ) : H¾t h¬i + To relieve ( v ) : Lµm gi¶m+ To prevent ( v ) : Ng¨n ngõa+ To disappear ( v ) : BiÕn mÊt+ Cure ( n ) = > to cure : Ch÷a trÞ


224


- Call some Ss from groups to give their discussion in front of the class .

3.While – reading :- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen

to the tape then check their discussion .

- Have Ss read the text in silent .- Call on some Ss to answer the pre-

questions .- Have some Ss read the text aloud .- Correct their pronunciation .- Have Ss read the text again and find

out the answers for the questions in the book.

- Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and asnwering the questions .


- Correct the mistake and give the correct answers :

a) Because every year millions of people catch it .

b) They are : a runny nose , a slight fever , coughing and sneezing .

c) No, there is no cure for the common cold .

d) No, these medicines don’t cure a cold , but they relieve the symptoms .

e) We can prevent a cold by eating well , doing exercise , keeping fit and staying healthy .

4.Post – reading :

- Play a game .

- Work in groups .



- Read the text in silent .- Answer the questions .- Read the text aloud .

- Read the text again and find out the answers .

- Work in pairs .


- Copy down .


225


- Ask Ss to write about the common cold .

- Call on some Ss to read their writings in front of the class .



- Do exercise 4 at page 73 in workbook .- Prepare unit 12- A1

f) Because every year millions of people catch it .

g) They are : a runny nose , a slight fever , coughing and sneezing .

h) No, there is no cure for the common cold .

i) No, these medicines don’t cure a cold , but they relieve the symptoms .

We can prevent a cold by eating well , doing exercise , keeping fit and staying healthy

- Write about the common cold .

- Read the writing aloud .

- Write homework.

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Period 71: English written test

I. The aims:

The students will know how to apply their knowledge to do the test well, from the test the teacher will

know each student and class’s knowledge and have the method to teach.


226


II. Preparing :

- Teacher : prepare a written test

- Students: Review

III. Test

2. Matran

Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Tổng

KQ TL KQ TL KQ TL

I.Grammar 5

2,5

5

2,5

II.Languge

focus

10

2,5

10

2,5

III.Reading 5

2,5

5

2,5

IV. Writing

5

2,5

5

2,5

Total 15

5

10

5

25

10

01

I. Give the past form of the verbs ( 2,5 pts)

1. see - 2. have 3. stop.

4. buy 5. cut 6. wear

7. return 8. fill 9. give

10. brush

II.Choose the best answer. (2,5pts)

1. Were you tired after the trip ? No, I ( am not / was not / were not )

2. Liz and her parents went to Tri Nguyen ( Temple / Aquarium / America ) in Nha Trang.

3. Yesterday, she ( has / have / had ) a toothache.

4. Minh is scared ( on / at / of ) seeing the dentist.

5. The nurse took her ( height / temperature / weight )

6. ( Who / What / How ) was wrong with you ? I had a bad cold.


227


7. I’m glad ( hear / to hear / hearing ) you are well.

8. Nga and Lan filled in their medical ( scales / records / minutes

9.Mai, add some sugar to the glass, please. A little or ___ ?

( a lot a lot of too much)

10.He drinks ___ cup of coffee every morning.(. a / an /. the )

III. Read. Then answer the question. ( 2,5pts)

The Robinsons had a great holiday in Nha Trang . Unfortunately, the holiday soon ended and it

was time to return home. They took a bus back to Ha Noi . Liz was excited as the bus drove through the

countryside. She saw rice paddies for the first time. Everything looked calm and peaceful. At four

o’clock, the bus stopped at a small roadside restaurant for 10 minutes. Mr Robinson was asleep, so Mrs

Robinson bought some peanuts and an ice cream for Liz. The bus arrived in Ha Noi at about 7 pm.

1. How did they return home ? ……………………………………………………………………

2. Did Mr Robinson buy some food for Liz ? …………………………………………………

3. Where did they have a great holiday ? ………………………………………………………..

4. Did they arrive home in the evening ? ……………………………………………………….

5. What time did the bus stop at a small roadside restaurant ?

IV. Write the correct form of the verbs(1,5pts)

1. I (play) __________ volleyball last week.

2. Last December, Mom (buy) __________ me a new bike.

3. Dad (work) __________ in Hue a few years ago .

*Write the sentences using the words given.(1pt)

1.I / be/absent / school / last semester

..............................................................................................................................................

2.Lan / not / go / school / yesterday because she / have/a headache

............................................................................................................................................

02

I. Give the past form of the verbs ( 2,5 pts)

1fill . 2. brush 3. stop.

4. cut 5. buy 6. wear

7. give 8. see - 9. return

10. have

II.Choose the best answer. (2,5pts)

1.I’m glad ( hear / to hear / hearing ) you are well. TrÇn ThÞ Thu HiÒn Trêng THCS Qu¶ng Liªn

228


2.The nurse took her ( height / temperature / weight )

3.He drinks ___ cup of coffee every morning.(. a / an /. the )

4..Nga and Lan filled in their medical ( scales / records / minutes )

5.Liz and her parents went to Tri Nguyen ( Temple / Aquarium / America ) in Nha Trang

6.( Who / What / How ) was wrong with you ? I had a bad cold.

7.Were you tired after the trip ? No, I ( am not / was not / were not )

8. Minh is scared ( on / at / of ) seeing the dentist.

9. Mai, add some sugar to the glass, please. ___ or ___ ?

( a little/ a lot of a lot of too much)

10. Yesterday, she ( has / have / had ) a toothache.

III. Read. Then answer the question. ( 2,5pts)

The Robinsons had a great holiday in Nha Trang . Unfortunately, the holiday soon ended and it

was time to return home. They took a bus back to Ha Noi . Liz was excited as the bus drove through the

countryside. She saw rice paddies for the first time. Everything looked calm and peaceful. At four

o’clock, the bus stopped at a small roadside restaurant for 10 minutes. Mr Robinson was asleep, so Mrs

Robinson bought some peanuts and an ice cream for Liz. The bus arrived in Ha Noi at about 7 pm.

1. How did they return home ? ……………………………………………………………………

2. Did Mr Robinson buy some food for Liz ? …………………………………………………

3. Where did they have a great holiday ? ………………………………………………………..

4. Did they arrive home in the evening ? ……………………………………………………….

5. What time did the bus stop at a small roadside restaurant ?

IV. Write the correct form of the verbs(1,5pts)

1. I (play) __________ volleyball last week.

2. Last December, Mom (buy) __________ me a new bike.

3. Dad (work) __________ in Hue a few years ago .

*Write the sentences using the words given.(1pt)

1.I / be/absent / school / last semester

..............................................................................................................................................

2.Lan / not / go / school / yesterday because she / have/a headache..

..............................................................................................................................................

The End


229


4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

..........................................................................................................................................................................

.

Period: 72

CORRECT THE WRITTEN TEST I (Term2)

I / Objectives : By the end of the lesson . Ss will be able to assess their knowledge in order to improve

their gaps.

II/ Teaching aids : Paper sheet

III/ Procedure :

CONTENTS NOTES

I. Give the past form of the verbs

1.Saw, 2.had, 3. stopped, 4.bought, 5. cut, 6. wore, returned, 8.

filled, 9. gave, 10. brushed

II.Choose the best answer. (2,5pts)-0,5 pt/one corect 1.answer

2. were not

3.Aquarium

4. had

5. of

6. What

7. to hear

8.records

9. a lot

III. Read. Then answer the question. ( 2,5pts)-)-0,5 pt/one corect

answer:

1. They returned home by bus.

T:read and write answer on the

board

Ss:correct

T:call some Ss to give answers

T:feedback


230


2. No, he didn’t.

3. They had a great holiday in Nha Trang.

4. Yes, they did .

5. The bus stopped at a small roadside restaurant at four

o’clock.

IV. Writing (2,5pts) ( 0,5 pt / 1 sentence )

1.I was absent from school last semester

2.She looked at my teeth and told not to worry

-write all answer on notebook

-Prepare next lesson unit 12 section A

T:call some Ss to give answers

T:feedback

T:correct and write on the boarb

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………............................................................................................................................................................................

Period 73UNIT 12 : LET’S EAT!

Lesson 1 : A – What shall we eat ? ( A1,2 )I.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the details and practice food vocabulary .II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Spinach - Durian - cucumber - Papaya - Pineapple - Ripe

-To smell


231


2.Grammar : - The simple present tense . - The structure : I’d like……. So do I / I do , too Neither do I / I don’t , either .

III.Technique : Explanation , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork .IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .V.Procedure :


- Greetings .- Have Ss play a game : Kim’s game .( Use the pictures or words written on the board of : fish , chicken , beef , milk , bananas, apples , carrots , oranges )- Call the students to go to the board

and write again .- Remark and lead in the new lesson .

2. New activities :- Ask Ss some questions such as :+ Do you usually go to the market ?+ Who do you often go to the market with ?+ What do you often see / buy at the market ?………………..- Introduce the situation of the lesson to

Ss and ask Ss to guess what Hoa and her aunt bought at the market .

- Have Ss look at the pictures and listen


- Go to the board and write .

- Answer T’s questions .

- Listen to the teacher and guess what they bought .

- Look at the pictures and


232


to the tape . - Ask Ss to look at the book and read

after the tape .- Explain some new words and

structures to Ss .+ Spinach ( n ) : Rau ch©n vÞt + Cucumber ( n ) : Da chuét + Papaya ( n ) : §u ®ñ + Pineapple ( n ) : Qu¶ døa+ Durian ( n ) : Qu¶ sÇu riªng+ Ripe ( adj ) : chÝn+ To smell ( v ) : ngöi thÊy / cã mïi Structures :+ I like spinach and cucumbers . So do I / I do , too.+ I don’t like pork . Neither do I ./ I don’t , either .

Have Ss play a game : What and where .- Ask Ss to read the dialogues in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice reading

in front of the class .- Correct their pronunciation .- Ask Ss to read the dialogues again to

find out the answer in the book .- Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers

1) What did Hoa and her aunt buy at the market ?

2) LN.3) Does Hoa like pork? How about her aunt ?4) LN.5) What meat would they like for dinner ?6) What are the favorite vegetables of Hoa’s

listen to the tape .- Read after the tape .


Read new words in chorus and individually , guess meanings and copy down .

Make sentences as models.

Play a game .- Work in pairs .- Practice reading in front

of the class .

- Read the dialogues again to find the answer .

- Play a game in 2 groups .

Take the numbers and answer


233


aunt?7) LN8) What fruit did they buy ?9) Why didn’t they buy a papaya ?10) LN2.Presentation :

- Explain some sentences of Hoa and her aunt in the dialogues .

- Model sentences :S1: I don’t like pork .S2: Neither do I / I don’t either .S1: I like spinach and cucumbers .S2: So do I / I do , too. ( So and too are used in the formative sentences . Neither and either are used in the negative sentences .)( Not either = Neither ) 3.Practice :

- Give some pictures or given words to Ss to practice .

+ Carrots . X+ Beef V + Papaya V + Cabbage X + Fish X + Chicken V - Have Ss work in pairs using the

structures they have just learnt and given words .


Remark

the questions .

- Clap the hands .

- Write the answers in the notebook .

- Talk about the food .- Work in groups making

conversations .- Practice in front of the

class .

- Practicing using given words .

- Work in pairs .

- Practice in front of the class .S1: I don’t like carrots .S2: Neither do I / I don’t , either S1: I like beef .S2: So do I / I do , too.

- Write down .- Practice in pairs ( free )- Practice in front of the

class .


234



lines for each .- Do exercise 1 at page 74 in workbook .- Prepare part 2 .

- Write homework .

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Period 74

UNIT 12 : LET’S EAT ! Lesson 3: A – What shall we eat ? ( A 3,4 ) I . The aims : After the lesson , Ss will understand how to make a meal by making some dishes .II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - To slice - Bowl - To boil - To heat - To stir- fry - Soy sauce - Chopsticks - Spoon 2.Grammar : The past simple tense


235


III.Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .V.Procedure : T’s Activities Ss’ Activities 1. Warm up :

- Greetings .- Ask Ss some questions :EX: Do you like chicken? Beef ?Do you know how to prepare a meal ? Lead in the new lesson .

2.New activities :A. Read . then answer the questions .

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer the question : What is she doing ?

- Call on some Ss to give the answer .- Introduce the situation and explain

some new words to Ss .+ To slice ( v ) : Th¸i + To boil ( v ) : Luéc+ To heat ( v ) : ®un nãng + To stir – fry ( v ) : Xµo+ Bowl ( n ) : C¸i b¸t+ Chopsticks ( n ) : §òa+ Soy sauce ( n ) : X× dÇu+ Spoon ( n ) : Th×a- Have Ss read new words in chorus and

individually .- Correct their pronunciation .


- Look at the pictures and answer the question .


Read new words in chorus and individually , guess the meanings , then copy down .


236


- Have Ss play a game : Rub out and remember in order to check new words .

- Have Ss guess the order of the statements :

a) First , she sliced the beef .b) Then she cooked some rice and boiled some

spinach .c) Hoa’s aunt cooked dinner .d) Next, she sliced some green pepers and

onions .e) And then she set the table and the family sat

down to eat .f) After that she stir- fried the beef and

vegetables .g) Finally , she sliced the cucumbers and made

cucumber salad .- Ask Ss to work in groups ordering the

sentences .- Call on some groups to give their

prediction- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to

the tape then check the order .- Call on some Ss to give the answers .- Correct and give the correct answer :

1. C 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. F 6. G 7. E - Have Ss read the text in silent .- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud .- Ask Ss to work in groups to write the

menu - Call on some groups to give the answers

.- Correct and give the correct answer :

- Play a game .

- Do exercise .

- Work in groups .- Give the predictions .

- Listen to the tape and check the order .

- Read the text in silent .

- Read the text aloud .- Work in groups .- Give the answers .- Write down .


237


+ Cucumber salad with onions .+ Boiled spinach + Stir- fried beef with green pepers and onions + Rice

B. Write . What did you eat and drink yesterday ?

- Ask some Ss the questions : what did you eat and drink yesterday ?

- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions .


3.Consolidation :- Have Ss write a short paragraph to tell

what they ate and drank yesterday .- Call on some Ss to read their writing in

front of the class .- Remark .


lines for each .- Lear part remember .- Do exercise 5 at page 76 in workbook .- Prepare B1 .

- Asnwer the question .

- Work in pairs .


- Write a short paragraph .

- Read the writing in front of the class .

Write homework .

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………


238


Period 75 UNIT 12 : LET’S EAT ! Lesson 4: B – Our food ( B1 ) I.The aims : After the lesson , Ss will be able to know why Ba had to go to the doctor’s and the reason which caused Ba’s stomachache .II. Language content : The structures :

- It must be …………..- It was probably ………- Make + somebody + Adj/ Do smt . - Thepast simple tense and present simple tense .

III.Technique : Eliciting , asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork.IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .V.Procedure :


- Greetings .- Have Ss play a game : Guessing

game .( Each student writes a sentence about the disease they had last time . One student goes to the board and the rest guess )- Remark and lead in the new lesson .

- Greetings .- Play a game .- All class take part in the

game .

- Look at the picture


239


2.New activities :- Ask Ss to look at the picture and

answer the question : Where is Ba ? What is the matter with him ? - Call on some Ss to give their predictions .- Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to

the tape and check their prediction.- Call on some Ss to give the correct

answers .+ Ba is at the doctor’s .+ He has an awful stomachache .- Explain some structures to Ss .+ It must be something you ate .+ It was probably the spinach .+ That dirt can make you sick .+ These medicine will make you feel better.- Have Ss make sentences with the

structures .- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice in front

of the class .- Correct their pronunciation .

Comprehension questions :- Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers

.1. What did Ba eat last night ?2.Who washed the spinach ?3.LN 4.Why did Ba go to the doctor?

carefully .

- Give the predictions .- Look at the book and

listen to the tape .- Give the answers .

- Listen to the teacher and copy down .

- Make sentences using the structures .

- Work in pairs .- Practice reading the

dialogue in front of the class .

- Play a game


- Clap hands .


240


5.Did his parents eat spinach ?6.LN 7.What made him sick ?8.What did the doctor give him ?-Remark and state the group which wins the game . Now complete the story .

- Ask Ss to complete the story based on the dialogue above .

- Have Ss exchange the result with the partner .

- Call on some Ss to give the result in front of the class .

- Correct and give answer key :Ba went to the doctor because he was sick . The doctor asked Ba some questions . Ba said he had some spinach last night . The doctor said he must wash the spinach more carefully/well. Vegetables can be dirty . The dirt can make people sick . She / the doctor gave Ba some medicine to make him feel better .

- Call on some Ss to read the story in front of the class .

3.Consolidation :- Repeat the content of the lesson and

the structures .

4.Homework :- Learn by heart the structures by

making 3 sentences with each .- Do exercise 1,2 at page 76,77 in

- Complete the story .


- Give the result .

- Copy down .

- Read the story aloud .


Write homework .


241


workbook .- Prepare part B2.

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

.....................................................................................................................................

...........................Period 76

UNIT 12 : LET’S EAT !Lesson 5 : B – Our food ( B2 )

I.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about a balanced diet . They will know what they should do to have a healthy lifestyle.II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Balanced diet - Energy - To affect - Body- building food - Moderate - Dairy product - Amount - Cereals - Lifestyle - Plenty of 2.Grammar :III.Technique : Explanation , using pictures or real objects , pairwork , groupwork .IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .V.Procedure :


242


T’sActivities Ss’ Activities 1. Warm up :

- Greetings .- Ask Ss some questions such as :+ What do you usually have for breakfast / lunch / dinner ?+ What is your favorite food ?- Remark and lead in new lesson .

2. New activities :- Introduce the situation : “ Food plays an

important part in our life . It gives us the main energy for body development . thus , a balanced diet is especially important . In our today’s lesson , we will learn about the definition of a balanced diet and useful guidelines about food”

- Explain some new words and phrases to Ss.

+ Balanced diet ( n ) : ChÕ ®é ¨n hîp lÝ + To affect ( v ) : ¶nh hëng + Moderate ( adj ) => Moderation ( n ) + Amount ( n ) : Sè lîng+ Energy ( n ) : N¨ng lîng+ Body- building food ( n ) : Thøc ¨n gióp ph¸t triÓn c¬ thÓ.+ Dairy product ( n ) : Thùc phÈm b¬ s÷a+ Cereals ( n ) : Ngò cèc+ Lifestyle ( n ) : Lèi sèng + Fatty food ( n ) : Thøc ¨n giµu chÊt bÐo - Have Ss read new words in chorus and

individually.




Read new words in chorus and individually , guess meanings , then copy down .

- Play a game .


243


- Have Ss play a game : Rub out and remember .

- Ask Ss to do an exercise : T or F prediction

What does a balanced diet mean?1) Eat a lot of meat .2) Eat a little fruit and vegetables .3) Eat a moderate amount of sugar .4) Eat a little fatty food .5) Eat plenty of food you like .- Have Ss discuss in groups .- Call on Ss to give their discussion .- Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to the

tape and check their prediction .- Call on some Ss to give the answers .- Correct the mistake and give the correct

answer :1. F 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F- Have Ss read the passage in silent .- Call on 3 or 4 students to read the

passage aloud .- Ask Ss to read the passage again and

find out the answers for the questions .- Have Ss work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in

front of the class .- Correct and give the answer key :

a) Sugar adds taste to food and it gives you energy .

b) A balanced diet is not enough all people need exercise to keep a healthy life .

c) Ss’ Answers .

- Do exercise .

- Work in groups .- Give their prediction.- Look at the book , listen to

the tape and check the prediction .


- Read in silent .- Some Ss read the passage

aloud .- Read the passage again to

find out the answers .- Work in pairs .- Practice asking and



read all the new words again

.


244


3. Consolidation :

Ask students to read all the new words again


lines for each .- Write a menu for yourself and your

family .- Prepare part 4 .

Write homework .

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

.....................................................................................................................................

......................................Period 77

UNIT 12 : LET’S EAT !Lesson 6 : B- Our food ( B4 )

I . The aims : The students will listen to a text for details and further practice in food vocabulary . They continue to practice listening skill .II . Language content :

- Review the food vocabulary .- The past simple tense

III.Technique : Eliciting , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork .IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .


245

A lot of Sugar Fatty food Should Meat A little Fruit

Too much Coffee Deep- fried foodShouldn’t


V.Procedure :


- Greetings .- Have Ss play a game : Slap the board .

- Have 6 students from 2 groups take part in the game .

- Remark and state the group which wins the game .

2. Pre – listening :- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and call

the names of the things in the pictures.- Call on 3 or 4 students to give their

answers - Correct the mistake and give the correct

answers .a. Rice b. Noodles c. Fish d. Vegetables e. Fruit f. Beef g. Juice h. Water

- Introduce the aim of the listening , then

- Greetings .- Play a game : Slap the

board .


Clap the hands

- Look at the pictures and call the names of the things .



246

Moderate

Body-building food

Energy Amount

Affect

Dairy product Balanced

diet


ask Ss to predict what Lan , Ba , Nga and Hoa had for their lunch .

- Have Ss work in groups .- Call on some groups to give their

prediction 3. While – listening :

- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape , then check their prediction .

- Play the tape for Ss ( two times )- Ask Ss to exchange the result with the

partner .- Play the tape again for Ss to check .- Call on some Ss to give the answers .- Correct and give the answer key :

Lan : f, b, d ,g Nga : a, d ,g Ba : c, a , e , h Hoa : b , e , g .

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and write what Lan , Ba , Nga and Hoa had for lunch .

- Call on some Ss to read their writing aloud

- Remark .4.Post – listening :

- Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers 1) What did Lan have for lunch ?2) LN .3) Did Ba have some fruit ?4) Who had vegetables ?5) LN 6) Who drank juice ?7) What did Ba drink ?8) Did Hoa have fish ?

- Work in groups .- Give the prediction .

- Look at the book and listen to the tape .


- Listen to the tape again and check the result .

- Write down .

- Write what Lan , Ba Nga and Hoa had for lunch .

- Read the writings aloud


- Answer the questions using the information in the listening .


247


- Remark .5. Homework :

- Write a paragraph about Lan , Ba , Nga and Hoa had for lunch .

- Do exercise 3,4 at page 77,78 in workbook .

- Prepare language focus 4 .

- Write homework .

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Period 78 LANGUAGE FOCUS 4 I.The aims : The students do exercises in order to practice the structures which have been learnt , they will use them and apply to do exercises well .II. Language content :

- The simple past tense .- Indefinite quantifiers : A little / a lot of / lots of / too much .- Too / either / neither / so .- Imperatives .

III.Technique : Eliciting , asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork , using pictures .IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , sub- board , pictures .V.Procedure :


248



- Greetings .- Ask Ss some questions such as :+ What did you do yesterday ?+ Did you watch TV last night ?+ What did you do during last summer vacation ?……………..- Remark and lead in new lesson .

2.Consolidation and practice :1) Past simple tense :

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book and answer what they are doing .

- Call on some Ss to answer the questions in front of the class .

a) Watch TV .b) Eat at a restaurant .c) Go to the movie theatre .d) Read books .e) Play soccer .- Have Ss answer the questions , using

the pictures .- Make example :S1: Did you do your homework last night ?S2: No, I didn’t . I watched TV .- Have Ss work in pairs asking and

answering the questions .- Call on some pairs to practice in front

of the class .


- Look at the pictures and answer what they are doing .


-

- Work in pairs .


- Write down .


249


- Correct and give the correct answers .f) Did you eat dinner at home on

Wednesday ?No, I didn’t . I ate dinner at a restaurant .g) Did you go to school yesterday ?No, I didn’t . I went to the movie theatre .h) Did you watch a video on the

weekend ?No, I didn’t . I read books .i) Did you play basketball yesterday ?No, I didn’t . I played soccer .- Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .

2)Indefinite quantifiers :- Have Ss repeat the indefinite

quantifiers and the use .- Ask them to do exercise 2 .

Write the correct expression .- Ask Ss to write the correct expression

, using the pictures .- Call on some Ss to give the answers

in front of the class .- Correct and give the correct answers :+ A little coffee . + A lot of salt .+ A lot of tea . + Too much water .+ A little sugar - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .

Complete the dialogues : - Have Ss look at the pictures and then complete the dialogues .

- Have Ss work in pairs .

- Repeat the indefinite quantifiers and the use .

- Do exercise .

- Write the correct expression .

- Give the answer .

- Write down in the notebooks .

- Look at the pictures and complete the dialogues .


class.

- Repeat the use of too,


250

Mangoes V Bananas X Papaya X

Corn V Spinach X Potatoes X



- Remark .3+ 4) Too and either / So and neither .

- Ask Ss to repeat the use of too/ so / either and neither .

- Have Ss practice the dialogues in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front the class .

- Have Ss play a game : Noughts and Crosses .

- Remark and ask Ss to write sentences in the notebooks.EX: S1: I like mangoes . S2: So do I / I do , too . S1: I don’t like bananas . S2 : I don’t , either / Neither do I .5) Imperatives :- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and complete the instructions .

either , so and neither .- Practice the dialogues in

pairs .- Practice in front of the class - Play a game .


Make sentences with the words , using too, so , either and neither .

- Write down .

- Look at the pictures and complete the instructions .


- Give the answer .- Write down in the


251

Mangoes V Bananas X Papaya X

Corn V Spinach X PotatoesX

Fish X Chicken X


- explain some new words :+ To Peel ( v ) + To mix ( v ) + Vinegar ( n ) - Call on some Ss to give their result in

front of the class .- Correct and give the answer key :a) peel e) Add b) Wash f) Stir c) Slice g) Wait d) Mix

3.Consolidation :- Repeat the structures which the

students have learnt .4. Homework :

- Do test yourself 4 in workbook - Review for doing a written test .

notebooks .


Write homework .

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………


252


Period 79

UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES Lesson 1 : A – Sports ( A1,2 )I.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about the ten most popular sports which teenagers in the USA like best and know the names of some sports . They will know how to change from adjectives to adverbs.II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary :

- Skate boarding - Roller- skating - Roller – blading - Baseball - Surprisingly - Surprising result . - To win - Competition - Prize - Participant

2.Grammar : Review the simple past tense and simple present tense .III.Technique : Eliciting , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork .IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .V.Procedure :


- Greetings .- Ask Ss some questions such as :+ Do you like playing sports ?+ What sport do you play ?



253


+ When do you play …….?+ Who do you often play with ?+ What do you think about ………?…………….- Remark and lead in new lesson .

2.New activities :A) Listen and read . Then answer the questions .

- Introduce the situation of the lesson and ask Ss to look at the pictures then answer the questions :

What are they doing ?- Explain some new words :+ Skate boarding ( n ) :+ Roller- skating ( n ) :+ Roller- blading ( n ) :+ Baseball ( n ) :+ Surprising result ( n ) :+ Surprisingly ( adv ) :- Have Ss read new words in chorus and

individually .- Have Ss play a game : Slap the board .- Have Ss discuss in groups about the

question : What sports do you think are the most popular in the USA ?

- Call on some groups to give their prediction .

- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape then check their prediction .

- Call on some Ss to give the answers .- Ask Ss to read the text in silent .

- Listen to the teacher , look at the pictures and answer the question .


- Read new words in chorus and individually , guess meaning then copy down .

- Play a game - Work in groups .

- Give the prediction .- Look at the books ,

listen to the tape and check the prediction .

- Give the answers .- Read the text in silent .- Read the text aloud .- Answer the questions .


254


- call on some Ss to read the text aloud .- Have Ss answer the question :What is the most popular sport in the USA ?Which sport is at 11th position ?- Have Ss work in pairs asking and

answering the questions .- Call on some pairs to practice in front

of the class .- .

3. Consolidation: Take a class survey :

- Have Ss work in groups asking their classmates what sport they like most .

- Call on some groups to practice in front of the class .

- Ask Ss to write the number of students who like each sport best , then complete the table in the notebooks .

- Ask Ss to answer the question : What sport is the most popular in the class ?


lines for each .- Write what sports you like best .- Do exercise 1,2 in workbook .- Prepare part A3,5

- .

- Copy down.

- Work in groups .


- Write the number of the students who like each sport best .

- Answer the question .

- Write homework .

4.Supplement:


255


……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Period 80 UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES Lesson 2 : A – Sports ( 3,5 )I.The aims : After the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to change from adjectives into adverbs .They will continue to talk about sports .II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Skillful => Skillfully - Safe => safely - Cyclist - To cycle - To be aware of - Lifeguard - Strict - To obey 2.Grammar : Structure : Adjectivie + ly => adverb III.Technique : Explanation , eliciting , pairwork .IV.Teaching aids :


256


Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .V.Procedure :



- Have Ss work in groups .- Call on Ss from 2 groups to go to the

board and write .- Remark and state the group which

wins the game .2.New activities :A) Listen . Then practice with a partner .

- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then ask Ss to look at the pictures and call the names of the pictures .

- Explain some new words to Ss .+ Good ( adj ) => well ( adv ) + Skillful ( adj ) => Skillfully ( adv ) + Safe ( adj ) => Safely ( adv ) + Cyclist ( n ) :+ To cycle ( v ) = To ride a bike - Introduce how to change adjectives

- Greetings .- Play a game : Networks

Discuss in groups .

- Go to the board and write



Read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down .


257

Most popular sports in the USA


into adverbs and the use of Adj and Adv :

Adjective + ly => adverb EX : Slow => Slowly Bad => badly Quick => quickly + He’s a good soccer player He plays soccer well+ She’s a quick runner She runs quickly .

Adjectives often go with To Be Adverbs often go with ordinary verbs .

- Ask Ss to make sentences using adjectives and adverbs .

- Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape .

- Have Ss work in pairs reading the text .- Call on some pairs to practice in front

of the class .B) Write . Change the adjectives in brackets to

adverbs .- Ask Ss to complete the passage with

the correct adverbs in brackets .- Explain some new words to Ss .+ To be aware of :+ Lifeguard ( n ) + Strict ( adj ) => Strictly + To obey ( v ) - Have Ss exchange the result with the

partner - Call on 2=> 3 Ss to give the results in

front of the class .


- Make sentences with the adjectives and adverbs .


- Work in pairs .- Practice reading in front

of the class .

- Complete the passage with the correct adverbs .


- Exchange the result


258


- Correct and give the correct answers - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .

3.Consolidation:- Repeat the way to change adjective to

adverb .- Give some cues and ask Ss to make

sentences .+ Slow / slowly / swimmer + Quick / quickly / runner + Bad / badly / volleyball Make example :+ She’s a slow runner She runs slowly .- Have Ss work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice in front

of the class .- Correct the mistakes .

4.Homework :- Learn by heart new words and

structures by making sentences with them .


- Prepare part B1 .

with the partner .- Give the results in front

of the class .- Write down .

- Listen .

- Make sentences with the cues .


- Write homework.

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………


259


.....................................................................................................................................

.............................Period 81

Unit:13 ACTIVITIES

Lesson 3 : A- SPORTS ( A4 )

I . Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice reading skills for specific information.

II . Language contents :

Vocabulary: to take part in ,participant, competition, to win, prize, district ,to increase regular

activities, to volunteer .

III . Techniques: Jumbled words, What and Where, Ordering Prediction,

IV . Teaching aids :

*Teacher: Computer, projector

*Students: book

V. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Student’s activities

Jumbled words:

tivitiac, torp, lucb, renchild, tme, bchea, pensiveex

A

4. Read. Then answer the questions

1. New words

to take part in = participate

participant (n) (translation)

competition (n) (translation)

to win - won ( explanation)

prize (n) (Explanation)

district (n) (Explanation)

to organize (explanation + ex)

to increase ( explanation)

regular activity (n)

to volunteer (v) (translation)

T: present the jumble words on the

board

Ss: look at the words and rewrite them

in the correct forms

T: correct again

B. New lesson

- T introduce by asking the questions

(picture) and present some words then

practice them

Ss: Listen and copy down then practice

in chorus , individual

- Checking new words


260


- What and Where

- Ordering Prediction:

a. Walking is a fun, easy and inexpensive activity.

b. Many people volunteer to take a walk instead of talking

motorbike or bicycle trips

c. In school there are many different sports activities.

d. The member of participants increase every week.

e. The regular activity of the club is a 5 km walk to the

beach.

- Correct their prediction:

2. Read . Then answer the questions .

- Ask Ss to read the text in silent .

- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud.

- Correct the pronunciation .

- Have Ss work in pairs to ask and answer the

questions .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class

.

- Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers

.

a) He takes part in Walking.

b) His school team won the first prize , they were so

happy and wanted to keep this activity .

c) One activity is a 5 walk to the beach on Sunday

morning , and the other is walk- to – school day

d) It’s 5 km from school to the beach .

e) Wednesday is the WTS day .

f) Members living near school often take part in the WTS

day .

- Ask Ss to copy down .

- Read the text A4 – P.132

T: guide how to do the exercise

Ss: guess to order the sentences

- checking Ss’ prediction

T: Have ss read the passage again and

answer the questions

Ss: do as requested and answer then

compare with partner

- write on the board

T: Control and correct mistakes again


261


Take a class survey :

- Have Ss work in groups asking their classmates

what sport they like most .

- Call on some groups to practice in front of the

class .

- Ask Ss to write the number of students who like

each sport best , then complete the table in the

notebooks .

- Ask Ss to answer the question : What sport is the

most popular in the class ?

- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for

each .

- Write what sports you like best .

- Do exercise 1,2 in workbook .

- Prepare part A3,5

- .Work in groups .


- Write the number of the

students who like each sport

best .

- Answer the question .

Write homework

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Period 82Unit:13 ACTIVITIES


262


Lesson: 4 ( B1 –B2 )

I . Objective : by the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the main idia of the dialogue by

listening to a dialogue about an invitation and practice in model verbs can,should ,ought to, must


-Vocabulary:

- Grammar: “ Yuo should/ ought to / must....……………….”

III . Techniques: Asking and Answering, Word-Cue-Drill, Chatting,

IV . Teaching aids :

* Teacher: Speaker, Easy talk

* Students: books

V. Procedures

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities * Chatting:

- What are they doing?

+ They are playing table tennis.

- Can you play table tennis?+ (Ss’ answer)

I. Pre teaching Vocabs

- Ought to ( modal verb): (synonym: should): nên

- must: ( modal verb): phải

- paddle( n) cây vợt( bóng bàn)

- borrow ( v): mượn

- * Checking: ROR

I. Presentation dialogue

- AskSs to look at the pictuer and ask:

“ What are Ba and Nam doing?

+ They are playing table tennis”

- Tell Ss they are giong to listen to what Ba and Nam talking

about in the coversation

T: Ask ss tell

T: listen and list the sports then correct

- Listen

- Repeat

- Cppy down

Ss answer

T: present the dialogue and read the

dialogue then give out new structures

- Practice them

Ss: Listen and copy down then practice

T: let Ss practice the dialogue


263


- Ask Ss to listen the first time without looking at the book

_ Ask Ss to listen and read at the same time:

- Ask Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs

- * Questions:

Ask Ss to answer the qestions

Answer the questions (P.134)

a. Nam must finish his homework before he plays table tennis.

b. Nam will be ready in a few minutes.

c. Ba will finish a question for Math.

d. Ba has two paddles

Model sentences

I ought to do my homework before I play table tennis.

You must do your homework first.

Form: Model verbs: Ought to

Must + V- inf

Have to

Practice:

a. Nam/ must/ do home work

b. We/should/ brush teeth/ after meals

c. Children / ought to/ swim/ with adult

d. She/ should/ drink /alot of warter

B2. Listen. Then practice with a partner . Change the

underlined details using the informations in the box

- Ask Ss to listen the dialogue and repeat

- Ask Ss to pracice with their partners( open pairs and clsed

pairs)

- Get Ss to make the similar dialogues using cue given and

picturtes

- T model with a student

Ss aswer the questions

T guides Ss how to practice answering

the questions

Ss: listen and do as directed

Listen to the teacher and copy down

-practice

- T. plays the tape and asks Ss

practice with their partners. Change

the underlined details using the

information in the box.


264


Ask Ss to meke their own dialogues

-Learn by heart new words and structure

Pracice the dialogues

- Ss practice in pairs.

- Call on some pairs to practice

-

- Ss look at the pictures Ex 2 P. 135

to practice.

- Call on some to practice

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ...........................................................................................................................................................................Period 83

Unit:13 ACTIVITIES

Lesson 5: B3

I . Objective :- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to master the content of the text.


-Vocabulary: Surface, underwater, pearl, diver, invention, ………

III . Teaching aids : - Pictures, sub-board

IV .Techniques: - True – false , Word-Cue-Drill

V. Procedures:


- Dictation:

water, land, swim, sport, life, study, freely.

B3. Read. Then answer the questions

T: read the words clearly and slowly

Ss: listen and stick the words

T: correct

- Ss answer


265


* New words

- underwater (a) (picture)

- breathing equipment (n) ( picture)

- invent, (v) ( example)

- invention (n) ( translation)

- scuba-diving (n) ( translation)

- vessel (n) ( translation)

- to explore (n) ( translation)

Checking ROR

- Open Prediction: (T/ F)

a. Most of the word’s surface is land.

b. Before the invitation of special breathing equipment,

man couldn’t swim freely underwater.

c. Now, scuba-diving is a popular sport.

d. Jacques Cousteau invented special TV cameras.

e. We can learn more about the undersea word thanks to .

Jacques Cousteau’s invention.

* Read

- AskSs to read and check their predictions

Answer Key: b. T, c. T, e. T

a. F. Most of the word’s surface is water.

b. T

c. T

d. F. Jacques Cousteau invented a deep-sea diving vessel

e. T

b. Answer the questions:

Reading comprehension : Lucky numbers .

1) How long could a pearl diver stay underwater?

2) Now, How long can a diver stay underwater?

3) LN

4) When did Jacques Couteau die?

5) When did he invent the deep sea diving vessel ?

- T introduce by asking the questions

(picture) and present some words then

practice them

Ss: Listen and copy down then practice in

chorus , individual

- Checking new words

T: guide how to do, first read the passage

carefully, then guess T/ F sentences.

Ss: guess to T/ F ( reading them carefully)

T: Let ss change their keys and correct

then give the correct answer ( sub-board)

Ss: Do as directed then correct mistakes

T: guide ss to practice

Ss: Play a game in groups .

Answers:

1.A pearl diver could stay underwater for

two minutes.

2. Now , a pearl diver could stay

underwater for a long time.


266


6) LN

7) What could he study ?

8) How can we explore the oceans now ?

Talk about the inventions , using couldn’t :

Eg : Before special breathing equipment, we couldn’t

explore the oeans

Cues: Electricity:

- read all night

- watch TV

- use computers

- Learn new words

- Write 5 sentences, using couldn’t for their past ability

4.He died in 1997.

5.He invented the deep sea diving vessel

in the early 1940s

7. He could study underwater life.

8. We can explore thr oceans with special

TV camera.

Display before class

Copy down

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… .......................................................................................................................................................................... Period 84 Unit:14 FREETIME FUN

A1.

I.Objectives:By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :

-express what they do in their freetime.

-talk about TV and their favorite TV programs.

II.Language contents:

+ Grammar:like / prefer + to-inf / gerund. TrÇn ThÞ Thu HiÒn Trêng THCS Qu¶ng Liªn

267


+Vocabulary: series, news, The Adventure of the Cricket, prefer, play chess, boring.

III.Techniques : repetition, pairwork , groupwork, explanation.

IV.Teaching aids: Speaker, easy talk

V.Procedures:


*Chatting:

-What do you often do in your freetime?

-do you watch TV?

-When do you usually watch TV?

-Where do you watch TV? In your home or in your

friend’?

-What TV programs do you like best?

A1.Listen.Then practice with a partner:

1.Lead-in:

Watching TV is one of the most popular activities in

freetime.You’ll listen to a conversation between Lan and

Hoa.Now,listen and answer:What do Hoa’s / Lan’s family

do in their freetime?

2.Listen to the tape:

3.Vocabulary:

- series(n):

- news(n):

-The Adventure of the Cricket

*Would you like to + V-inf.?

- I’d love to. ( I’m sorry. I can’t)

- Would you like to have dinner at my house tonight?

*That sounds + Adj : That sounds boring .

*Prefer to + V-inf : I prefer to do other things

*Open prediction:

T:ask Ss some questions about TV.

Ss:answer the questions one by one.

T:feedback and correct the mistakes.

T:use a picture(page 140) and ask

some questions to introduce the

lesson.

Ss:look at textbook and listen to the

tape.

T:introduce new words on board.

-picture

-translation

-picture.


268

-This is the picture of Hoa’s family.Look at it and guess-Who are they?-What are they doing?-Can you guess when they often play it?-Do they like it?

- introduce some grammar notes

What does Hoa usually do in the evening?


1.Practice the dialogue:

2.Questions:

a.Where does Lan invite Hoa to have dinner?

b.What time do they have dinner?

c.Do they like to watch” The Adventure of the Cricket”?

d.Does Hoa’s family have a TV ?

e.Why doesn’t Hoa’s family have a TV?

f.Does Lan’s family always watch TV in the evening ?

3.Now choose the best answer:

a-C b-A c-B d-C e-D

*Talk about the topic:”What do your family often do in

the evening ?”

-watch TV -play video games

-read newspaper / books -listen to music

-play chess. -do homework

*Fill in the blanks:

Lan invites Hoa to (1) ……… with her family.Lan’s

family always (2) ………. every night.Hoa’s family

doesn’t have a (3) ……….. because her uncle and aunt

Ss:take notes and read them in

chorus and individual.

Ss:work in groups :listen and check

a.What do Hoa’s family do in their

freetime ?

→have dinner / read books / talk about

their day / play chess

b.What do Lan’s family do in their

freetime ?

→have dinner / watch TV .

Ss:work in pairs:roleplay the

dialogue with their partners.


Ss:work in pairs:ask and answer the

questions with information in the

dialogue.

T:share Ss sheets of paper and guide

them to do the task.

Ss:read and choose the best answer

to complete the sentence with

information in the dialogue.

Ss:talk about what their family often


269

What does Lan usually do in the evening?


don’t (4) ……… to watch TV .So they often talk about

their day.Then they usually(5) …….. and sometimes (6)

……..

1.eat dinner 2.watch TV 3.television

4.prefer 5.read 6.play chess

-Learn vocabulary by heart.

-Finish all the answers into your notebooks.

-practice the dialogue with your partners.

-Prepare:A2.

+find out new words.

+read the dialogue.Then answer :

a.What does Hoa invite Lan to do?

b.What do they want to see on Friday?

do in the evening.




Ss:work in groups: read and fill in

the blanks to complete the passage

with information in the dialogue.

T:guide Ss to learn at home.

Ss:do as directed.

4.Supplement:

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………

...............................................................................................................

......................................................Period 85 Unit:14 FREETIME FUN

Lesson 2: A2.

I.Objectives:By the end of the lesson, students will be able to : express invitation and reply to an

invitation identify kinds of movies and entertainments programs,


+ Grammar:simple present tense.

+Vocabulary: Culture house, Opera house, detective, cowboy movie, pop concert, classical concert.

III.Techniques : repetition, pairwork , groupwork, explanation.

IV.Teaching aids TrÇn ThÞ Thu HiÒn Trêng THCS Qu¶ng Liªn

270


*:Teacher: easy talk, speaker

* Students: books

V.Procedures:


*Networks : watch TV

*Possible answers: watch TV , read , listen to music ,

play

games , go to the movies / zoo , go fishing / smimming

…

A2.Listen and read.Then practice with a partner:

1.Identify entertainment programs in the poster:

-Youth culture house:

- Opera house:

- detective movie:

- cowboy movie:

- pop concert:

- classical concert:

2.Open questions:

a.Where is pop concert / classical concert / detective

movie /

cowboy movie on …?

b.What time is it on?

c.What programs do you like best?

You’ll listen to a conversation betwwen Hoa and

Lan.They are discussing the suitable programs to

Ss:work in 2 groups : go to

the board and write names of freetime

activities


T:use a poster to identify entertainment

programs and introduce new words.

Ss:take notes and read them in

chorus and individual.

Ss;answer the questions with

information in the poster.

T:introduce the lesson.


271

Freetime activities


see.You listen to it and answer :”Which program will

they see ? “

3.Listen to the tape:

1.Practice the dialogue:

2.Questions:

a.What does Hoa invite Lan to do?

b.What is there on at the New Age Theater ?

c.Which program will they see?

d.When will they see it ?

*Now look at the advertisements.What do you want to

do?Work with a partner.Make up a similar conversation.

*Example:

A:Would you like to go to the theater this weekend?

B:That sounds good.What would you like to see ?

A:There’s a play on at Youth theater.

B:Ok.When is it?

A:It is on Saturday evening.

B:That’s ok.What time will we meet?

A:About 7 o’clock.Is it ok?

B:That’s good.I’ll be at your home then.

*Choose the best answer:

1.Would you like to go to the movies?

a.Yes, I do b.Yes, I like c.Yes, I’d love.

2.There is a ……… on at Fansland Theater.

a.cowboy movie b.detective movie c.pop concert.

3.Lan and Hoa will see ……… at The New Age

Ss:look at the conversation and

listen tothe tape.

Ss:work in pairs:roleplay the

dialogue with their partners.


questions with information in the

dialogue.

T:guide Ss to do the task.

Ss:work in pairs: look at the

advertisements and make up a

similar conversation.




Ss:work in groups: read and choose

the best answer to complete the

passage with information in the

dialogue.

*Keys :


272


Theater.

a.cowboy movie b.detective movie c.pop concert.

4.They will see cowboy movie on ………..

a.Wednesday b.Thurday c.Friday


-practice the dialogue with your partners.

-Prepare:A3.


+complete the summary with information in the

passage.

1.c 2.b 3.a 4.c


Ss:do as directed.

4.Supplement:

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………

..........................................................................................................................................................................

.

.

Period 86 Unit:14 FREETIME FUN

Lesson 3: A3.

IIBjectives:by the end of the lesson, students will be able to read for details and understand the

development of tv in vietnam.


+ grammar:simple past tense.

+vocabulary: owner,neighbor, gather, inside, outside, change, comfortable.

III.techniques : elicitation, pairwork , groupwork, explanation.

IV.teaching aids:

*Teachers:pictures, handouts, textbooks.

* Students: books

V.procedures

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities TrÇn ThÞ Thu HiÒn Trêng THCS Qu¶ng Liªn

273


*Chatting:


-Do you like watching TV?

-Do you have one at home?

-What about your neighbor?

-Was TV popular 30 years ago?

-How about nowadays? Is it very popular nowadays?

A3.Read :

*Vocabulary:

-TV owner(n):the person who has a TV set .

-neighbor(n):

-to gather:

- inside(prep) #outside(prep):

-to change:

-comfortable(a)# uncomfortable(a):

*Guiding questions:

a.What is the main idea of the passage?

It is about the development of TV in Vietnam.

1.Comprehension questions:

a.Was TV in Vietnam popular 30 years ago ?

b.What did people do after dinner ?

c.What color were the TV programs 30 years ago ?

d.Where do people watch TV today ?

e.Is TV popular nowadays?




T:stick 3 pictures and ask Ss some

questions to introduce the lesson.


-explanation

-translation.

-translation.

-antonym.

-translation.

-antonym.

Ss:scan the passage and find out the

main idea of it.


questions with their partners about

the passage.



274


2.Now complete the summary: now look at “now

complete the summary”. The summary is written in

another way.you use information in the original passage

and complete it.

1.people 2.not 3.TV 4.popular 5.evening 6.gather

7.They 8.today 9.have 10.life 11.know

*Compare TV in Vietnam 30 years ago and nowadays:

30 years ago Nowadays

-TV wasn’t popular.

-People watched the black

and white programs.

-There weren’t many

programs.

-People could watched TV

programs at night.

-TV is very popular.

- People watch the colored

programs

- There are many

interesting programs.

-People can watch TV

programs everywhen.


+read the dialogue and answer the questions in your book.

( a e / page 144 ).

.



Ss:work in groups:read and fill in

the blanks with suitable words to

summary the passage.



Ss:work in groups: write to compare

TV in Vietnam 30 years ago and

nowadays



4.Supplement:

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………


275


Period 87 Unit:14 FREETIME FUN

Lesson 4: B1,2.

I.Objectives:By the end of the lesson, students will be able to practice the topic about TV , they talk about

their favorite programs and the time of some programs on TV .


+ Grammar:simple present tense.

+Vocabulary: sports show ,Children’s program ,Early news,Weather forecast ,The world today,A first

ful of dollars’

III.Techniques : elicitation, pairwork , groupwork, explanation.

iv.Teaching aids

* Teacher: :speaker, easy talk

* Students: books

V.Procedures:


1.Networks :


Ss:work in groups:

*Possble answers : news in country /

world , weather forecast ,music / sport

shows ,programs for

children ,advertisement , play ,reform play

movies .


276

TV programs

news


-Do you like watching TV?

-What program is on TV?

-What kinds of programs do you like?

-What kinds of programs don’t you like?

B1.Listen.Then practice with a partner :

*Listen to the tape :

*Vocabulary:

-cartoon (n) : Tom and Jerry is cartoon

-sport show(n):

like / prefer + to-inf / V-ing :

+He likes to watch cartoon / He likes watching cartoon .

1.Practice the dialogue :

2.Comprehension questions:

a. Does Nga watch a lot of TV? Why/ Why not?

b. What does Ba like to watch on TV?

c. What does Nga like to watch on TV?

d. Why doesn’t Nga like music programs on TV?

e. What is Nga going to do this evening?

B2.Listen.Write the times of programs :

*New words :

-children’s programs = programs for children

-Early News (n):

-weather forecast (n) :

-The world Today :

*Answer the questions :



T:stick a picture on board and ask Ss

some questions to introduce the

lesson .

Ss:look at the conversation and

listen to the tape .


-explanation

-translation.

-introduce structure



Ss:work in groups:

programs.Now listen and write down .

Ss:listen and write the time of each


277


a.What is on TV at six tonight ?

b.What time do children’programs start ?

c.Is weather forecast at 6:10 ?

d.Does the movie start at 6:15 ?

-

Learn vocabulary by heart.

-Finish all the exercises into your exercise books.

-Prepare:B3,4.


program


Ss:answer the questions about the

listening .




Ss:do as directed.

4.Supplement:

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………

..................................................................................................................................................................

Period 88:

UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN

Lesson 5 : B- What’s on ? (B3,4)

I. The aims :

After the lesson , the students will understand about popular TV programs . They will continue to

know some more vocabulary about TV programs .

II. Language content :

1. Vocabulary :

- Audience - To contest

- Artist - Contestant

- To perform - Folk music TrÇn ThÞ Thu HiÒn Trêng THCS Qu¶ng Liªn

278


- Imports - To include

- Satellite - Cable TV

2. Grammar :

Review : the simple present tense .

III. Technique :

Explanation , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork .

IV. Teaching aids :

Textbook , pictures , tape , cassete , sub- board .

V. Procedure :

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up :- Greetings .- Have students play a game : Noughts and Crosses

EX: What kind of programs do you like? I like to watch Early News .- Have students play in 2 groups .- State the group which wins the game.2. New activities :


All class take part in the game .

- Play game in 2 groups .


279

Early News The world Weather today forecast

Cartoons Sports shows Movies


A. Listen and read . Then answer the questions .- Ask students to look at the three pictures and identify them .- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words :+ Audience : The person who watches the shows .+ Artist ( n ) : A famous singer .+ To perform ( v ) :+ To contest ( v ) = To compete + Contestant ( n ) = Competitor + Folk music ( n ) :+ Imports ( n ) = foreign series .+ To include ( v ) : - Have students read new words in chorus and individually .- Check new words by playing a game called rub out and remember .- Have students do an exercise : T or F prediction .1. Pop music , contests , imports are popular TV programs .2. Teenagers like to listen to classical music .3. There are contests of knowledge .4. The contestants are students , workers , TV viewers .5. Imports are very expensive .- Have students work in groups in 2 minutes .- Call on some groups to give their

- Look at three pictures and identify them .- Listen and write .


- Play a game .

_ Do an exercise .

- Work in groups .- give the prediction .Listen to the tape and check .

- Give the answers in front of the


280


predictions .- Ask students to look at the books , listen to the tape and check their predictions .- Call on some students to give the answers .- Correct and give the correct answers :1. T 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F - Have students read the passage aloud .- Correct their pronunciation .- Ask students to work in pairs asking and asnwering the questions in the books .- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .- Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers .a. Teenagers like to hear the latest pop music and see the shows of their favorite artists .b. They are students , workers or family members c. Imports usually include police and hospitals .d. Students’ answer.B. Write. Complete the passage . Use the words in the box .- Ask students to look at the words in the box and read them aloud .- Explain some new words to students .+ To be possible : the same meaning with Can.+ Satellite ( n ) :+ Cable TV ( n ) :

class

- Read the passage aloud .

- Work in pairs .

- Practice asking and answering in front of the class .

- Read the words in the box .


- Complete the passage .

- Exchange the results with the partners .- Give the results in front of the class .


281

Name Pop music Contest Imports others

LanHoaNam


- Have students complete the passage , using the words in the box .- Ask students to exchange the results with the partners .- Call on some students to give the results in front of the class .- Correct and give the answer key :1. Around 2. Watch 3. Listen 4. Series 5. Show 6. Like 7. Station 8. Receive 9. Cities 10 . Possible - Ask 2 students to read the passage aloud .3. Consolidation :- Have students take a survey :Ex: S1: Do you want to hear pop music ? S2: Yes, I do./ No, I don’t .Or : S1: What TV programs do you want to see? S2: I want to see the contests ._ Have students work in groups .4. Homework :- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each .- Do exercise 3,4 at page 91 in workbook .

- Read the completed passage aloud .

- Take a survey .- Listen .

- Work in groups .

- Write homework .

4.Supplement:

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………


282


Period 89 WRITTEN TESTTime : 45 minutes

I. The aims : The students apply their knowledge to do the test , and through the test the teacher can be able to know the knowledge of each student . From that will have the method to teach them well.A. MA TRẬN ĐỀ THI

Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụngTổng

TN TL TN TL TN TL

I. Language

focus

16

4

4

2

20

6

II. Reading4

24

2

III. Writing4

24

2

Tổng16

48

44

228

10

A. Even Test .I. Choose the correct answers .

1. I can’t go out for a walk now . I ………..my homework .

A. must do B. must to do C. must doing

2. My father is a …………football player .

A. skill B. skillful C. skillfully

3. Would you like to go to the movies to night ?

A. Yes , I do B. Yes, I like C. I’d love to

4. ………………do you like ?


283


A. What of programs B. What kinds of programs C. What of kinds programs

5. In 1960s , ……….. in Vietnam didn’t have a TV set .

A. Most of people B. Most people C. Most of the people

6. I ought to finish my homework before I………..table tennis .

A. will play B. play C. am playing

7. Playing chess after dinner sounds …………..to me .

A. boring B. bored C. boringly

8. We’ ll take a walk instead ………riding a bicycle.

A. of B. for C. with

9. We can learn more about the undersea world ……….Jacques Couteau’s invention. A. thanks to B. thanking to C. with thanks to

10. John is a fast runner . He runs very …………….

A. fast B. fastly C. quick .

11. This river is very …………….for the swimmers .

A. danger B. dangerous C. dangerously

12. What would you like ……………..?

A. see B. seeing C. to see

II. Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets .

1. I’d like ( tell ) ……………you something about myself ..

2. She ( not like ) ……………..riding . She prefers walking .

3. Nam prefers taking part in sports to ( watch )………………them.

4. Lan usually ( watch )…………….TV in the evening .

III. Read the dialogue between Ba and Nam , then answer the questions .

Ba : Would you like to see a movie , Nam ?

Nam : Yes , I’d love to . What would you like tosee ?

Ba : There is an interesting movie on at the New Age theater .

Nam : What movie is it ?

Ba : It’s a detective movie .

Nam : OK . Let’s go this evening then .

Ba : I’m sorry I can’t . I have to finish my homework tonight . What about tomorrow evening ?

Nam : Sorry . I’m going to visit my grandmother . How about Friday evening ? Ba : That’s OK . Let’s meet at half past seven in front of the theater . TrÇn ThÞ Thu HiÒn Trêng THCS Qu¶ng Liªn

284


1. What would Ba like to see ? ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 2. Will Ba and Nam go to the theater tonight ? …………………………………………………………………………………………. 3. What is Nam going to do tomorrow evening ?………………………………………………………………………………………… 4. When will they go to see the movie?....................................................................................................................................... 5. Where will they meet ?…………………………………………………………………………………………IV. Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given . 1. Nam is a good table tennis player . => Nam plays ……………………………………………………………………….. 2. Why don’t we go to the amusement center ? => What about ………………………………………………………………………? 3. He likes playing soccer better than watching TV . => He prefers ………………………………………………………………………. 4. You should stay inside at recess . => I advise …………………………………………………………………………. 5. What is your age?=> How...........................................................................................................................?

B. Odd Test :I. Choose the best answer : 1. You ought ……………..to the dentist . A. to go B. go C. going 2. This river is very …………….for the swimmers . A. danger B. dangerous C. dangerously 3. What would you like ……………..? A. see B. seeing C. to see


285


4. ……….is a fun , easy and inexpensive activity . A. a walking B. walking C. to walk 5. There are many good programs ………….teenagers . A. on B. for C. with 6. We can learn more about the undersea world ……….Jacques Couteau’s invention. A. thanks to B. thanking to C. with thanks to 7. John is a fast runner . He runs very ……………. A. fast B. fastly C. quick . 8. Which do you prefer , playing sports or watching TV ? A. I prefer playing sports and watching TV to doing other things . B. I prefer playing sports to watching TV . C. I prefer playing sports because it can help me to stay healthy . 9 . My father is a …………football player . A. skill B. skillful C. skillfully 10. We’ ll take a walk instead ………riding a bicycle. A. of B. for C. with 11. Playing chess after dinner sounds …………..to me . A. boring B. bored C. boringly 12 . We’ ll take a walk instead ………riding a bicycle. A. of B. for C. withII. Supply the correct forms of the verbs in bracbets . 1. When my father ( be ) …………young , He ( drink ) ……………..a lot of wine . 2. They ( perform ) ……………….” Romeo and Juliet” last Sunday . 3. She’ d like ( drink ) ………………a glass of cold water . 4. Many years ago, many people in Vietnam ( not have ) ………………….TV sets. 5. My younger brother prefers ( play ) …………….chess to ( watch) ..………….cartoons . III. Read the dialogue between Ba and Nam , then answer the questions . Ba : Would you like to see a movie , Nam ? Nam : Yes , I’d love to . What would you like tosee ? Ba : There is an interesting movie on at the New Age theater .


286


Nam : What movie is it ? Ba : It’s a detective movie . Nam : OK . Let’s go this evening then . Ba : I’m sorry I can’t . I have to finish my homework tonight . What about tomorrow evening ? Nam : Sorry . I’m going to visit my grandmother . How about Friday evening ? Ba : That’s OK . Let’s meet at half past seven in front of the theater . 1. Where is the movie on ? …………………………………………………………………………………. 2. Why doesn’t Ba go to the theater tonight ? …………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Is Nam going to see a play with his parents tomorrow evening ? ………………………………………………………………………………….. 4. When will they go to the theater ? ………………………………………………………………………………….5. Where will they meet ?…………………………………………………………………………………………

IV. Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given . 1. How about going to the movies this week ? => Why …………………………………………………………………………. 2. My father drives very carefully . => My father is ………………………………………………………………… 3. Reading books is more boring than watching TV . => Watching TV is more……………………………………………………… 4. You advise you not to watch TV too late . => You should ………………………………………………………………. 5. What is your height?=> How ..................................................................................................................?

4.Supplement:


287


………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………

Period 90Correcting the Test

Aim: Correcting the fourth test ( reteach the grammar that students can’t use to do talk so that they can redo the test well. )Objective. By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the grammar to do the exercise in the test as well as the one has the same model. Stages

- Asking students to change paper sheets to make exchange correction.- - Ask students to give the answers key on the board.


288


- - Correcting the mistakes.EvenTest :I. Choose the best answer .1. A 2. B 3. C 4. B 5. B 6. B 7. A 8. A . 9 10 11 12II . Supply the correct forms of the verbs .1. To tell 2. Spend - playing 3. doesn’t like – prefers 4. taking - watching 5. watches III. Answer the questions .1. He would like to see a movie .2. No, they won’t .3. He is going to visit his grandmother .4. They will meet in front of the theater .IV. Rewrite these sentences .1. Nam plays table tennis well .2. What about going to the amusement center ?3. He prefers playing soccer to watching TV .4. I advise you to stay inside at recess .5. How old are you ?Odd Test :I. Choose the best answer :1. A 2. B 3. C 4. B 5. B 6. A 7. A 8. B 9 10 11 12II. Supply the correct forms of the verbs .1. was - drank 2. performed 3. to drink 4. didn’t have 5. playing – watching 6. doesn’t like III. Answer the questions .1. It’s on at the New Age Theater .2. Because he has to finish his homework .3. No, he isn’t .4. They will go to the theater on Friday evening .IV. Rewrite these sentences .1.Why don’t we go to the movies this week?


289


2. My father is a very careful driver .3. Watching TV is more interesting than reading books .4. You should not watch TV too late .5. How tall are you?

4.Supplement:

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………

....................................................................................................................................................................

Period 91 UNIT 15 : GOING OUT Lesson 1 : A – Video games (A1) I. The aims : After the lesson , the students will be able to give the advice and respond for not doing something such as : playing video games . They will talk about video games and disadvantages of playing video games .II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Video games - Arcade - Amusement center - Addictive 2. Grammar : Structure : Don’t spend too much of your time in the arcade . No, I won’t .III. Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork , IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , sub- board .V. Procedure :


290


T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up :- Greetings .- Have Ss play a game : Networks .

- Have Ss play game in 2 groups .- Remark and lead in new lesson .2. New activities :- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the question : What can you see in the picture ?- Introduce some new words :+ Amusement center ( n ) : A place where we can go to play some games for relaxing .+ Video games ( n ) :+ Arcade ( n ) : + Addictive ( adj ) :- Have students read new words in chorus and individually .- Have students play a game : what and where .- Have students look at the dialogue and listen to the tape .- Ask students to read after the tape .


2 groups take part in the game .Discuss in groups , then Ss go to the board and write down .

- Listen and answer the question .


- Read new words .

- Play a game .- Look at the book and listen to the tape .- Read after the tape .- Work in pairs .- Practice in front of the class .


291

Entertainments


- Have students work in pairs reading the dialogue.- Call on 3 or 4 pairs to practice reading in front of the class .- Correct their pronunciation .- Introduce the new model sentence :+ Don’t spend too much of your time in the arcade.=> No, I won’t .( Advise somebody not to do something .)- Ask students to make examples as model .- Ask students to read the dialogue again and find the answers for the questions in the book .- Have students work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of the class .- Have some students go to the board and write the correct answers .- Ask students to write the answers in the notebooks .a. He’s going to the amusement center .b. He’s going to play video games .c. He goes to the amusement center about once a week .d. No, he doesn’t . e. He usually stays for about an hour .f. Because video games can be addictive .g. He will do his homework later .3. Consolidation :- Give a mapped dialogue and ask students to look at carefully .

- Listen .

- Make examples as model .- Find the answers for the questions

- Work in pairs .- Practice asking and answering in front of the class .- go to the board and write the answers .- Write in the notebooks .

- Look at the mapped dialogue .


292


YOU YOUR FRIEND

Where ….going ? Amusement center

What …….do? video games

How often ? 2/ week

Don’t spend …. video games …Don’t forget ……homework .

- Have students work in pairs .- Call on 2 or 3 pairs to practice in front the class .- Correct the mistake if necessary .4. Homework :- Learn by heart new words and structure by making 2 sentences with each .- Do exercise 1, 2 in workbook .- Prepare part A2,3 .

- Work in pairs .- Practice in front of the class .

- Write homework .

4.Supplement:

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………

...............................................................................................................

......................................................Period 92 : UNIT 15 : GOING OUT Lesson 2 : A- Video games (A 2)


293


I. The aims : By the end of the lesson , students will be able to understand video games and some disadvantages of playing video games .II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Inventor - Social skill - Dizzy - Premises - To develop - Robbery - To identify - Industry 2. Grammar : - Modal verbs . - The present simple tense . III. Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .V. Procedure :

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up :- Greetings .- Ask students some questions such as :+ Do you like playing video games ?+ How often do you play video games ?+ How long do you usually spend playing video games?+ What do you think about playing video games ?- Remark and lead in new lesson .2. New activities :A. Listen and read .-*new words :+ Inventor ( n ) The person who invents


- Listen and do exercise .


294


videogames .+ Dizzy ( adj ) :+ To develop ( v ) :+ Social skill ( n ) :- Have students read new words in chorus and individually .* prediction .1. Children like playing video games because they are good fun .2. It’ s very good for children to spend too much time on their own .3. Playing video games for a long time will make the children become tired .4. Children mustn’t play outdoors with their friends .5. Some inventors become rich when they are very young - Have students work in groups .- Call on some groups to give their prediction.- Ask students to look at the books and listen to the tape then check their prediction .- Call on some students to give the answers .- Correct and give the correct answers :1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T - Ask students to read the text in silent .- call on 3or 4 students to read the text aloud .- Correct their pronunciation .* Now answer , complete the sentences .- Have students read the text again to find out the answers - Have students exchange the results with the partners .- Call on some students to give the answers in front

- Work in groups .- Give the prediction .- Listen to the tape and check the prediction .- Give the answers .

- Listen to the tape again .

- Read new words in chorus and individually .- Read the passage in silent .- Read aloud .

- Read the passage again to find the answers .- Exchange the results with the partners .


295


of the class .- Correct the mistake and give the correct answers .a) Many young people play video games .b) Some inventors of video games become very rich .c) The doctor thinks all children should take part in outdoor activities with their friends .d) The doctor says you should spend little time playing video games .- Have students write in the notebooks ..3. Practice :- Ask students to use the grids to make sentences about what they should do and shouldn’t do .Ex : We should play outdoors . Yes , we should .- Have students work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .4. Homework :- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each .- Do exercise 3,4 in workbook .- Prepare the next lesson .


- Work in groups .

- Demonstrate the ideas .

- Write homework .

4.Supplement:

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

……………………………………………………………………………

Period 93: UNIT 15 : GOING OUT Lesson 3 : B – In the city ( B1,2 ) I. The aims : After the lesson students will be able to know about life in the city and life in the country . Practice 4 skills : listening , reading , speaking and writing .


296


II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - The rest - To scare - To hate - Awake - Get used to - Direction 2. Grammar : Review : the simple present tense and past tense .III. Technique : Brainstorming , Asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork .IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , Pictures about the city and the country .V. Procedure :

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up :- Greetings . - Have students play a game : Wordsquare .

- Ask students to find the words which relate to the city and country .- Have students work in groups .-Remark and lead in new lesson .2. New activities :- Ask students to look at the picture and answer


Discuss in groups to find the words which relate to the city and the country .

- Work in groups .


297

H R O B H G I E NO C L U B Z W S CO Z K S J V Q I ED R S Y M N T O G M Z J R K Y T


the question : What is the picture about ?- Ask students some questions such as :+ Do you like to live in the city or in the country ? Why / why not ?- Introduce the situation of the lesson .- Ask students to look at the book and listen to the tape , then answer the question : Lan and Hoa , who likes to live in the city or in the country .- Play the tape for students .- Have students give the answers .- Introduce some new words to students :+ The rest ( n ) :+ Awake ( adj ) :+ To scare ( v ) :+ To hate ( v ) = to dislike + To get used to + N .+ Direction ( n ) :- Have students read new words in chorus and individually .- Have students play a game : rub out and remember .- Have students discuss about life in the city and life in the country .* Brainstorming :Life in the city Life in the country Crowded Little traffic………… …………..- Have students work in groups .- Call on some groups to give their ideas .- Have students read the dialogue in pairs .- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class .

- Look at the picture and answer the question .- Answer T’s questions .

- Listen .- Look at the book and listen to the tape then answer the questions .

- Give the answers .- Listen and write .

- Read new words in chorus and individually .- Play a game .- Discuss about life in the city and life in the country .

- Work in groups .- Give the ideas .- Work in pairs reading the dialogue .- Practice reading the dialogue


298


- Correct the pronunciation .- Ask students to read the dialogue again and find the answers for the questions . * Lucky numbers 1. Where did Hoa live before ?2. Why doesn’t Hoa like the city ?3. LN .4. What does Hoa do in the evening ?5. What does Hoa dislike most in the city ? Why ?6. Does She like the city ?7. LN 8 . Why did Hoa like living in a village in Hue?- Remark and ask students to write the answers in the notebooks .3. Consolidation :- Ask students to use the questions in part B2 to work in pairs discussing about life in the city and life in the country .- Have students work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .- Correct and remark.4. Homework :- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each - Write the answers in part B2 in the exercise books .- Prepare part B3,4 .

in front of the class .- Find the answers .



- Discuss about life in the city and in the country .


- Write homework .

4.Supplement:


299


………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………

Period 94: UNIT 15 : GOING OUTLesson 5 : B – In the city ( B3- 4 )

I. The aims : After the lesson students will know how Hoa got used to the life in the city and what she could do . They practice reading and listening skills .II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Rarely - To socialize 2. Grammar : - Review : The simple present tense and past simple tense . - Like / Prefer + to infinitive ; Like + gerund III. Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork , using pictures .IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .V. Procedure :

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up :- Greetings .- Have students play a game : Networks



300 City

Country


- Have students work in groups .- Have students go to the board and write .- Remark .2. New activities :A. Read .- Introduce the content of the text : The text tells how Hoa got used to the city life .- Ask students to read the text and find out what she could do .- Have students read the text in silent .- Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class .- Call on some students to read the text aloud .- Correct the pronunciation .- Introduce new words :+ Rarely ( adv ) :+ To socialize ( v ) : + Structure : Like / prefer + to infinitive Ex: Hoa likes to read / She prefers to socialize with her friends .Like / prefer + gerund .Ex: Hoa like playing chess very much .- Ask students to make sentences as model .- Give some more questions and ask students to answer :a) What did Hoa and her friends often do

- Work in groups .- Go to the board and write .

- Listen .

- Read the text and find out what she could do .- Read in silent .- Give the answers in front of the class .- Read the text aloud .


- Make sentences .- Answer the questions .


301


together ?b) Why did Hoa rarely go to see movies or eat out in the evening ?c) Why couldn’t Hoa read many books in her village ?d) Why did Hoa decide that the city wasn’t so bad after all ?- Have students work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class .- Correct the mistakes .- Ask students to read the text again then make a list of the things Hoa does in the evening , using the simple present tense .- Have students exchange the results with their partners .- Call on some students to give their answers in front of the class .- Call one student to go to the board and write down .- Correct and ask students to write in the notebooks .B. Listen . Match each name to an activity .- Introduce the aim of the listening .- Ask students to look at the pictures and give the activity of each picture .- Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class .- Have students guess and write the names next to the pictures .- Ask students to listen to the tape and check their prediction .

- Work in pairs .- Ask and answer in front of the class .

- Make a list of the things Hoa does in the evening .

- Exchange the results .

- Give the answers in front of the class .- Go to the board and write .- Write in the notebooks .

- Listen to the teacher .- Give the activity of each picture .

- Guess and write the names next to the pictures .- Listen to the tape and check the prediction .- Listen.- Give the answers in front of the class .- Check the answers .


302


- Play the tape for students .- Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class .- Play the tape again for students to check the answers - Correct and give the key :Ba- b Hoa- a Nga – d Nam – c Lan – f An – e 3. Consolidation :- Ask students to use the model in part B3 and the pictures in B4 to talk about what they like to do or dis like to do .- Have students work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .- Remark .4. Homework :- Write the things that you often do in the evening .- Do exercises in part B in workbook .- Prepare unit 15 –B4,5.

-


- Write homework .

4.Supplement:

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………

Period: 95Unit 15 : Going out

Lesson 5 : B5 - In the CityI. The aims


303


After the lesson, the students will be able to describe the work of a student at school and Ba’s activities at school and at home . They use the present simple tense to talk about school subjectII. Language content1. Vocabulary : - teribble - burger - in addition to - flat - pain 2. Grammar :



Text book , cassette , tape , picturesV. Procedure

Teacher’s Activities Students’ ActivitiesI. Warm up* Chatting.- Have Ss look at 2 pictures and answer the questionsThis is Ba. What is he doing ?II. Pre Reading1.Pre teaching vocabulary Introduce some new words :- teribble - burger - in addition to

- Look at the picture and answer the questions<Students can answer the questions in Vnamese if don’t know >He’s playing the guitar He’s repairing the household appliances

- read new words in chorus and individually


304


- flat - pain - Checking technique : Rub out and remember2. True / False Statement Prediction- Using a poster1/ Ba enjoys his school very much2/ His favorite subject is Electronics3/ In this class he does some experiments4/ He is’nt good at fixing things5/ He can help his parents at home 6/ He never goes to art club- Have Ss work in groups- Call on some representatives to give their predictionsIII. While Reading1.Reading and correcting- Ask Ss to read the text and check their predictions- Cal on some students to give the answers on front of the class- Correct and give the correct answers1 – T 2 – T 3 – F 5 – T 6 – F- Call on some Ss to read text aloud - Correct their pronunciation 2. Comprehension Questions :- Ask Ss to read the text again to find out the answers for the questions- Have Ss work in pairs- Call on some pairs to ask and answer

- Then copy down

- Play game

- Work in groups- Give the prediction

- Read the text & check the prediction- Give the answers in front of the class- Copy down


- Read the text again to find out the answers- Work in pairs- Some pairs practice in front of the class- Copy down


305


ion front of the class- Correct and give th answer keya/ He likes Electionics bestb/ Yes , he does. He enjoys school very muchc/ He learns to repair house hold applicanesd/ He will able to fix his own appliancese/ Yes , he is . His drawings are very good - About you :- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions about them selves - Make model :T : What do you do in your free timeS : I play soccerT : What are you goot at ?S : I am good at drawingT : What is your favorite aubject ?S : My favorite subject is fine Arts- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class- Correct the mistakes if necessary* Homework:- learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each

- Work in pairs

- Listen carefully


- Make a survey.

- Work in groups.- Give the results.

- Write homework

.Supplement:

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………


306


………………………………………………………………………………………………

Period 96 Unit 16: people and places

Lesson 1: (A1,2)

I. Objective:

By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use the simple present with Frequency adverbs

to talk about famous places

II. Materials

Text books , posters

III. Ways of teaching:

T-WC, individual, pairwork, groupwork

IV. Teaching procedure

1.Warm up:

2. Introduce the lesson: Today we will learn unit 16: lesson 1:A1

3. Presentation:

*Pre teach vocabulary

-album (n): an bum ®ùng ¶nh

- region (n): vïng miÒn

- occasionally (adv): ®«i khi, thØnh tho¶ng

*Checking vocabulary: Rub out and remember

*Presentatio dialogue: A1 p154

- Ask ss to read the dialogue and then draw out sentences in the present simple with adverbs of frequency.

He usually flies to Hong Kong. He sometimes goes to Phnom Penh

*Model sentences: He usually flies to Hong Kong.

4.Practice:

- Ask ss to practice the dialogue with their partners. TrÇn ThÞ Thu HiÒn Trêng THCS Qu¶ng Liªn

307


- ask ss to do the matching (a-f) on p155

- give feedback.

*Answer keys:

a – D (Ba’s uncle is a pilot)

b – F (Uncle Nghia sends post cards to Ba from the cities he visits)

c – B (Ba keeps the post cards as well as the stamps)

d – c (Ba puts the stamps in a special book)

e- A (Hoa wants to see the stamps)

f – E (Ba and Hoa would like to visit many different places)

5. Further practice *noughts and crosses:

- dive the class into two teams

- Put the “Noughts and crosses” poster on the board.

1. he / fly / Bangkok 2. I / not travel / Singapore 3. She / go / Phnom Penh

4. You / visit / Beiing 5. They / send post cards /

Jakarta

6. He / fly / Hong Kong

7. They / fly / Kuala Lumpur 8. He / go / Vientiane 9. She / travel / Yang on

- Ask ss to make complete sentences with the simple present and adverbs of frequency.

6. Completing the table (A2 p155)

- Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the table, match the names of the countries in the box.

- give feedback. *Answer keys:

capital country

Bangkok

Beijing

Kuala Lumpur

Phnom Penh

Vientiane

Yang on

Jakarta

Thailand

China

Malaysia

Cambodia

Loas

Myanmar

Indonesia

- Use the table to ask and answer.

example exchange:

S1: Where does Ba’s uncle fly to?

S2: He usually flies to Bangkok.


308


V. Homework:

-do exercise A1 p99

***************************************************************************

Period 97:

Unit 16: people and places

Lesson 2: (A3,4)

I. Objective:

By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know about pilot’s schedule

II. Materials

Text books , posters, cassette, tape




1.Warm up:

2. Introduce the lesson: Today we will learn unit 16: lesson 2:A3,4

3.Pre listening*prediction:

- Tell ss that they are going to listen to this pilot’s schedule.

- ask ss to work in pairs to guess pilot’s schedule with the correct places.

example: On Monday, he flew to Bangkok.

4. While listening:

- Ask ss to listen to the tape twice and check their predictions.

- Get ss to compare with their partners.

- give feedback. *Answer keys:

Monday: Bangkok and Singapore

Tuesday: Singapore TrÇn ThÞ Thu HiÒn Trêng THCS Qu¶ng Liªn

309


Wednesday: Jakarta

Thursday: Bali

Friday: Bali

Saturday: Hong Kong

Sunday: Back to Hanoi

Pre teach vocabulary:

- attraction (n):

- ancient monument (n):

- resort (n):

- culture (n):

- coral (n):

- to admire :

- shadow puppet show (n):

Checking vocabulary: Rub out and remember

4.While reading*pre questions:

-have ss work in pairs to answer the questions.

Why do tourist like to visit South-East Asia?

- give feedback.

- Ask ss to listen to the tape A4 p156

- Ask ss to read the text about destinations on p156 and check if their answers are correct or not.

*Answer keys:

+Because South East Asia has many attractions, they could visit many ancient monuments and temples.

+They can enjoy traditions of different cultures .....

Comprehension question:

- Have ss work in pairs to answer the questions a-b on p157

- Answer keys:

a. The three kinds of tourist attractions mentioned in the passage are ancient monuments, shows and

resorts.

b. I prefer the traditions of different cultures

- Ask ss to practice asking and answering questions in open pairs and closed pairs.

- Ask ss to match three kinds of tourist attractions with suitable activities

-Answer keys: 1-b 2-c,e 3-a,d,f

5. Post reading TrÇn ThÞ Thu HiÒn Trêng THCS Qu¶ng Liªn

310


V. Homework: -do exercise A2 p100

*******************************************************************

Period 98:


Lesson 3: B1

I. Objective:

By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more about a famous person and a

historic place, students will know how to use “prefer, like, favourite” to talk about famous people.

II. Materials

Text books , posters, cassette, tape




1.Warm up: 2. Introduce the lesson: Today we will learn unit 16: lesson 4:B1,2

3. Pre-listening


- a quiz (n): c©u ®è- a battle (n): trËn ®¸nh- the Genaral (n): vÞ tíng- to lead: l·nh ®¹o- to defeat: ®¸nh th¾ng- force (n): lùc lîng- to be famous for: næi tiÕng vÒChecking vocabulary: Slap the board

True / False prediction:

a. Liz knows a lot about General Giap.

b. The people’s Army of Vietnam defeat the French in 1956.

c. The people’s Army of Vietnam won the battle of Dien Bien Phu.

d. General Giap was born in 1920.

e. Ba does like history.

f. Liz will lend Ba some history books.

- give feedback.

4.While listening: TrÇn ThÞ Thu HiÒn Trêng THCS Qu¶ng Liªn

311


-ask ss to listen to the tape twice and check their prediction.

- ask ss to compare with their partners.

- give feedback and correct.

*Answer keys:

a. F (Liz doesn’t know about General Giap)

b. F (The people’s Army of Vietnam defeated the French in 1954)

c. T

d. F (General Giap was born in 1911)

e. T

f. F (Ba will Liz some history books)

Fill in the form: Ask ss to listen again and fill in the form:

Name:

Year of birth:

Job:

Famous for:

The battle:

5. Post reading * write – it – up

- let ss write a short paragraph about General Giap, using the cues from the form and the dialogue.

*Sample: Vo Nguyen Giap was born in 1911. He is a famous General and he was a Commander – in –

chief. He is famous for leading the people’s Army of Vietnam won the battle of Dien Bien Phu.

6. Predict dialogue B2 p 158

- Set the scene: Hoa and Lan are talking about famous players. Guess and complete the dialogue.

- Ask ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue then answer the questions:

a. Does Lan like Romario? No, not very much

b. Who does she prefer? Why? She prefers Pele. Because Pele is a better ..

c. Who is Hoa’s favourite player? Michael Jordan

d. Who is your favourite singer? My Linh

7. Practice: example exchange:

a. Hong Nhung / Thanh Lam S1: Do you like Hong Nhung?

b. Hieu Ngan / Thuy Hien S2: I prefer Thanh Lam

c. My Linh / My Tam S1: Why?

d. Xuan Bac / Van Hiep S2: Becausw Than Lam is prettier than Hong Nhung

e. Ronaldo / Beckham. S1: My favourite singer is Hong Nhung. TrÇn ThÞ Thu HiÒn Trêng THCS Qu¶ng Liªn

312


V. Homework:

- do exercise B1,2 p102

******************************************************************

Period 99:


Lesson 5: B2- 4

I. Objective:

By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more about famous people and their

biographies.

II. Materials

Text books , photocopied pictures




1.Warm up:

2. Introduce the lesson: Today we will learn unit 16: lesson 5:B3,4

3. Pre-reading


- A bulb (n): bãng ®Ìn- An invention (n): sù ph¸t minh- A gramophone (n): m¸y ®Üa h¸t- An actor (n): nam diÔn viªn- To establish: thiÕt lËp- A motion picture: phim ¶nh- An author: t¸c gi¶- A fairy story: truyÖn thÇn tiªnChecking vocabulary: Rub out and remember.

Open prediction

- Introduce Thomas Edison and Hans Christian Andersen.

- Ask ss to work in pairs to predict what Thomas Edison and Hans Christian Andersen did by doing the

matching.

- (match new words from pre teach to the two famous people).

*example: TrÇn ThÞ Thu HiÒn Trêng THCS Qu¶ng Liªn

313


Thomas Edison Hans Christian Andersen.

a bulb an actor

4.While reading:

- Ask ss to read the text on p.159 – 1960 and check their prediction.

- give feedback

*Answer keys:

Thomas Edison Hans Christian Andersen.

a bulb

an invention

a gramophone

to establish

a motion picture

an actor

an author

a fairy tale

5. Post reading: Role play (B4 a-b p160)

- tell ss that one of them is student A and the other is student B.

Student A: You are a newspaper reporter. Imagine you are going to interview Thomas Edison. Ask as

many questions as possible.

Student B: You are Thomas Edison. A new reporter is going to interview you. Use the information in the

reading passage to answer the questions.

- ask ss to work in pairs to play the role of A and B.

A: When were you born, Mr Edison?

B: I was born in 1847.

A: Where were you born?

B: I was born in USA.

A: What was your most famous invention?

B: The Electronic light bulb.

A: Besides the light bulb, what else did you invent, Edison?

B: I invented the pgramophone and motion pictures.

A: Thank you for your information.

B: My pleasure.


314


V. Homework:

- do exercise B3,4 p103

*******************************************************************

Period 100:


Lesson 5: B5

I. Objective:

By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more about Uncle Ho’s biography by

listening to a text.

II. Materials

Text books , cassette, tape




1.Warm up:

2. Introduce the lesson: Today we will learn unit 16: lesson 6:B5

3. Pre-listening


- To leave -> left: rêi- To move: di chuyÓn- To found: s¸ng lËp- To form: thµnh lËpChecking vocabulary: What and where

Prediction

- Set the scene: Uncle Ho traveled to many places in the world. Predict the places where Uncle Ho

traveled.

- give feedback.

Africa

keys: China, America, Guang zhou, Paris, London, Moscow, England TrÇn ThÞ Thu HiÒn Trêng THCS Qu¶ng Liªn

315

Places where Uncle Ho traveled


4.While reading:

- Ask ss to listen to the tape and check their predictions.

- give feedback.

- let ss listen again and complete the table B5 on p161.

- have ss compare with their partners.

- give feedback.

*Answer keys:

Events Year Place

date of birth 1890 Lim Lien

left Vietnam 1911 Africa, England, America

worked in hotel 1900s London

went to another country 1917 Paris

moved again 1923 Moscow

founded Vietnamese

Communist Party

1930 Guang zhou

Formed Viet Minh front 1941 Vietnam

Became President 1945 Hanoi

Died 1969 Hanoi

5. Post reading: write it up. - have ss use the table above to write a paragraph about Uncle Ho, using the verbs in the past simple tense.*sample:Uncle Ho was born in Nghe An. He left Vietnam in 1911 and traveled to Africa, England and America. After this, he worked in hotel in London in 1900s, then went to Paris in 1917 and then moved to Moscow. He founded Vietnamese Communist Party in 1930 in Guang zhou. He formed the Viet Minh Front in 1941. He became President of Vietnam in 1945. Uncle Ho died in Hanoi in 1969. He will always be remembed by the Vietnamese people.- ask ss to swap their writing with their partner and correct their partner’s mistakes.


316


V. Homework: - do exercises on p104,105-Period 101:

language focus 5I. Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to express likes and dislikes, and tell the reason why, and use the simple past, simple prsent, present progress, simple future tense.II. Materials Text books III. Ways of teaching: T-WC, individual, pairwork, groupworkIV. Teaching procedure 1.Warm up: 2. Introduce the lesson: Today we will learn unit 16: language focus 5 3. Presentation 1: Expressing likes and dislikes *Matching- Ask ss to look at the likes and dislikes expressions on the bottom left on p 165 and do the matching.- give feedback.*Answer keys:

likes dislikesI’d like .... I don’t really like ....I prefer .... No, I don’t like ....Yes. That sounds nice I don’t know .....- get ss to work im pairs to look at the menu, decide which items to order and make similar dialogues, using the likes and dislikes expressions and “would you like ....?”“What would you like to eat?”“What would you like?”- ask ss to use the information in the boxes to help them (p165)


317


- what would you like to eat?- I’d like spring roll.- Would you like beef salad?- No. I don’t like beef salad.Ask some pairs of ss to play the role before the class.4.Presentation 2 Tense (4 p166) - revision of the present simple, the past simple, the present progressive, the simple future tense.- remind ss of tenses by giving examples.- Ask ss to read the sentences (p166) and check the correct column.- give feedback.*Answer keys:

sentences past present futurea. I live in Ho Chi Minh City.

b. Ba is practicing the guitar.

c. Hoa went to the doctor.

d. Quang Trung School will hold its anniversary celebration on March 23.

e. Nam ate too much cake at the birthday party.

f. It is beautiful

g. Hoa is riding her bike to school.

h. The basketball game started at 3.30 pm

i. I am very happy.

j. It will be cool and cloudy

- revision of Because 5 p166-1675. Presentation 3: Brainstorming

- Let ss read the dialogue a p166Nam: What is your favourite color, Lan?Lan: RedNam: Why?


318


Lan: Because it’s lucky.- Ask ss to make up the dialogues about what color/sport/TV program they like

and reason why.- Ss will take turns to be A to practice the dialogue.

V. Homework:- write the dialogues which have already done in their notebooks.

Period: 101 . REVISION

I/The aims of the lesson: to help students do some exercises to prepare for the final test.

*Grammar: Question words,prepositions,verb forms/tenses; II/Teaching aids: Text book, posters, pictures,…III/Procedures:I/ Ñieàn giôùi töø thích hôïp vaøo choã troáng.( in, on, at, from…to…, between… and…, next to, near, behind, in front of, about, under, to, opposite … )

1. The pen is _________ the table.2. They are waiting ______ front of the zoo. .3. The telephone is _______ to the lamp.4. The picture is _______ the wall.5. I often listen _____ music ____ the evening. rack

III/ Ñaët caâu hoûi cho töø gaïch chaân.1. It’s about 3 km from here to the zoo2. They are in the library.3. I get up at 6 o’clock.4. There are 52 students in my class5. This envelope is 200 dong.6. We go to school 6 days a week.

IV/ Cho daïng/ thì ñuùng cuûa ñoäng töø trong ngoaëc.1. What ( you/ do ) ______________ now ? I (learn) _______________English.2. Keep silent ! The teacher (look ) _____________ at you.3. My father (not play) _____________ tennis in his free time.


319


4. They (have) _______________ some new clothes soon.5. Mai (wash) _______________ her hands before the meals.6. Long (watch) ______________ TV every night.7. Mary usually (go) _____________ to school on foot, but now she (go) ___________

to school by bike.8. Mai often (get) _____________ up late but tomorrow she (get) ____________up

early because she (have) _____________a test.9. How often (you/read ) ________________ a newspaper ? Everyday.10. What (your father/do ) _________________ ? He’s a teacher but he (not

work ) ________________at the moment.

IV)Homework-Do those exercises again

.....................................................................................................................................

............................... Period: 102 . REVISION


*Grammar: Question words,prepositions,verb forms/tenses; II/Teaching aids: Text book, posters, pictures,…III/Procedures:I/ Vieát laïi caâu theo töø gôïi yù.

1. My friends have more candies than I. -> I don’t 2. She eats fewer chocolate than Mai. -> Mai eats The book is under the lamp.

-> The lamp 3. My house is between the bank and the book store -> The bank

____________________4. Tuan is Mai’s younger brother -> Mai is 5. Fruit is better than candy -> Candy is 6. My classes start early than Hoa’s classes -> Hoa’s classes


320


7. Mai is taller than Hoa -> Hoa is __________________________________ II/Choïn töø thích hôïp nhaát ñeå ñieàn vaøo choã troáng

1. I am ______ to meet you ( glad, nine, fine)

2. Nice _______ you again (to meet, meeting, met, meet)

3. I live _______ 130 Hung Vuong street. (in, on, at, to)

4. Lien has a lot of _______ at her school (friend, a friend, friends,class)

5. Would you like ________ the concert. (go, went, to go, goes)

6. What is your ______ ? 115 Ly Thai To street (name, age, class, address)

7. Will you be tomorrow? No, I _______ (will, willn’t, won’t, shall)

8. I’m a new student. ________ (So am I, Iam so, Yes, I am, I do too)

III. Rewrite the sentences with the cues words

1. Why / Nga / go / doctor / yesterday ?

………………………………………………………………………………………………..? 2. I / ought / work / hard / as / student ?

………………………………………………………………………………….………………..?IV)Homework

-Do those exercises again



*Vocabulary: (Revision)*Grammar: Question words,prepositions,verb forms/tenses; *Skills:-Main skill: speaking, -Other skills: reading, writing, listening


321


II/The objective of the lesson:-By the end of the lesson , students will be able to do some grammar exercises-They will have a better skills doing written test

III/Teaching aids: Text book, posters, pictures,…IV/Procedures:1)Give students some exercises 2)Students do those exercises individually3)Check and correct the exercises4)Give students some experiences to remember when doing the grammar exercises

I/ Ñoïc ñoaïn vaên sau roài vieát T sau nhöõng caâu ñuùng, F sau nhöõng caâu sai:

Hoa is my friend. She is in class 7B . She is 12 years old. She lives in a small house with her parents. It is about 300 meters from her house to the school so she always goes to school on foot. We often go to her house. Her house is very lovely. I like her house very much. There is a yard in front of her house with a lot of colorful flowers. There are six room in her house, but I like the living room best because it is the most beautiful room in her house.

1. Hoa is a student ________

2. She is thirteen now. ________

3. Her house is far from the school. ________

4. There are four rooms in her house. ________

5. There is a yard behind her house. ________

6. There are a lot of flowers in the yard. ________

7. I like the living room very much. ________

8. The bathroom is the most beautiful best. ________

II/ Vieát laïi caùc caâu sau vôùi töø gôïi yù ñaàu sao cho nghóa caâu khoâng ñoåi:

1. Your pen is under the newspaper.

The newspaper ______________________________________________


322


2. My farm has a lot of vegetables and cattle

There are ___________________________________________________

3. Lan is Tuan’s younger sister.

Tuan _______________________________________________________

4. The market is in front of the restaurant.

The restaurant ______________________________________________

5. The market is on the left of the restaurant.

The restaurant is____________________________________________

6. My teacher rides a bike to the school every day

My teacher goes ____________________________________________

7. Long is 15 years old, Nga is 13 and Loan is 10. Long is the _________________


III/Chọn từ thich hợp điền vào chỗ trống

9. I am ______ to meet you ( glad, nine, fine)

10. Nice _______ you again (to meet, meeting, met, meet)

11. I live _______ 130 Hung Vuong street. (in, on, at, to)

12. Lien has a lot of _______ at her school (friend, a friend, friends,class)

13. Would you like ________ the concert. (go, went, to go, goes)

14. How ______ is it from your house to your school? (much, many, far, old)

15. Her new school is ______ than her old school. (big, bigger, biger, biggest)

16. She is _______ because she gets bad mark. (happy, unhappy, nice, fine)

17. What ______ you often do in your free time? (does, are, is, do)

18. Be careful! The bus ________ (coming, is coming, come, comes)

19. The moon _______ around the Earth. (go, to go, goes, going)


323


20. ______________________? On Hoang Van Thu street.

a. where do you live? c. who do you live with?

b. What do you live? d. Where are you live?

21. What’s your ________ of birth? (day, date, Monday, Tuesday)

22. _________ will we meet? In front of the movie theatre (where, when, what, who)

23. He _______ go to the library tonight? (shall, will, willn’t, shall not)

24. What is your ______ ? 115 Ly Thai To street (name, age, class, address)

25. Will you be tomorrow? No, I _______ (will, willn’t, won’t, shall)

26. I’m a new student. ________ (So am I, Iam so, Yes, I am, I do too)

27. Caâu naøo sau nay laø ñuùng.

a. What is she in class? C. What class she is in?

b. What class is she in? d. caû A vaø C ñeàu ñuùng

28. Her new school is different ________ her old school? (of, with, from, x)

29. How old are you? ________( I’m very fine thank you, I’m five, Fine thanks, Thank you)

30. Her new house is ____________ her old one? (bigger than, as bigger than, biger than, as big than)

31. ________________? She live at 12 THD street (Where does he live, where does she live, where she lives, where does she lives)

32. How do you go to school? (by bicycle, on foot, with bicycle, Both a and b are correct)

33. ________ is it from your house to your school? It’s not far, About one kilometer (How long, how far, how often, how)

34. Will you be free tomorrow evening? _______________ (Yes, I will/ No, I will/ Yes/ Yes, I won’t)


324


35. Is there a picture on the wall? ___________ ( Yes, there be/ Yes, there is not/ Yes, there is/ No, there is)

36. What does your father do? He ___________ (is farmer, a farmer, does as a farmer, is an farmer)

37. He works _________ a hospital. He takes care ________ patients (in- for/ in – of/ at – for/ for – of)

38. Today, Hoa is fine and so ________ (is Mai, does Mai, are Mai, do Mai)

39. ____________________? Miss Lan is talking to her new friend

a. Who is Miss Lan talking to? c. What is Miss Lan talking about

b. Who is Miss Lan talk about? d. Who is talking to Miss Lan?

40. ______________ from HCM City to Nha Trang ? (How far , How far is, How far is it, How far it)

41. Phöông Thanh _______ 13 next month (shall be, are going to come, come, want to come)

42. 8320795 __________ my telephone number (are, is, will be, shall be)

43. Lan will be thirteen _______ 5th May (on, in, at, x)

44. Who do you live with? I _____________ with my parents (live, am live, lives, will live)

45. What’s your date of birth? ___________ (the eighth of June, eighth of June, June eight, eighth June)

46. What _________ beautiful days! (a, the, an, x)

47. The living room _________ a table and four chairs (has, is living, have, are having)

48. He works in hospital. He is a ________ (journalist, farmer, teacher, doctor)

5)Homework-Do those exercises again


325


UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN Lesson 1 : A – Time for TV ( A1 )I.The aims : After the lesson , Ss will learn about a new topic , The activities in freetime such as watching TV , playing chess….. and know specific information about Lan and Hoa .II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Series - Adventure - Cricket - To sound - to prefer - To guess 2.Grammar : Review the invitation and accepting or refusing . Would you like to …………. => I’d love to / I’m sorry , I can’t ……III.Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork , using picture .IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , picture .V.Procedure


- Greetings .- Chatting with Ss about their freetime by

some questions :What do you usually do in your freetime ?Do you like watching TV?Do you like watching news in English?What programs on TV do you like watching?



326


What is your favorite program?How much time do you spend watching TV a day ?………………….

- Remark and lead in new lesson .2. Presentation :

- Ask Ss to look at the picture and introduce : This is the picture of Hoa’s family . Look at it and guess what they do in their freetime ? do they watch TV?

- Introduce the situation : Watching TV is one of the most popular activities in freetime . We are going to listen to a dialogue between Lan and Hoa . What do Lan’s / Hoa’s family do in their freetime ?

- Explain some new words to Ss .+ Series ( n ) : + Adventure ( n ) + Cricket ( n ) + To prefer ( v ) = to like ……better …+ To sound ( v ) + To guess ( v ) = to predict - Have Ss read new words in chorus and

individually .- Have them play a game : what and

where .- Ask Ss to guess what Lan and Hoa

usually do in the evening .- Call on some Ss to give their predictions

.3. Practice :

- Look at the picture and listen .




- Play a game .- Guess what Lan and

Hoa do in the evening .

- Give the predictions .

- Look at the books , listen to the tape and check the


327


- Ask Ss to look at the books , listen to the tape and check their predictions .

- Call on some Ss to give the answers .

- Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue

- Call on 3 or 4 pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class .

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again then choose the best answers .

- Have Ss exchange the results with the partners .

- Call on some Ss to give the answers .- Correct and give the key :

a) Lan invites Hoa to eat dinner with her family .

b) Lan wants Hoa to watch TV before dinner .c) Hoa’s family doesn’t have a TV because her

aunt and uncle don’t like watching TV.d) Hoa likes spending time with her aunt and

uncle at night .e) Lan’s family always watches TV in the

evening - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .

4. Production :- Have Ss work in pairs asking and

answering about themselves .- Call on some pairs to practice in front of

predictions.- Give the answer :

Hoa usually talks about her day, then she reads and sometimes she plays chess .Lan usually watches TV.


- Practice reading in front of the class .

- Do exercise .- Exchange the results

with the partners .- Give the answers .

- Write down.

- Work in pairs .- Some pairs practice in

front of the class .

- Write homework .


328


the class .- Remark .

5.Homework .- Learn by heart new words by writing 3

lines for each .- Do exercise 1 at page 87 in workbook .- Prepare part A2 .

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN Lesson 2 : A – Time for TV ( A2 ) I.The aims : The students practice the dialogue in order to review the structure “ Would you like to ………?” question and answer to talk about their favorite TV program . Practice speaking skill.II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Detective movie - Pop concert - Classical concert - Cowboy movie - Drama - Advertisement 2.Grammar : Review : would you like to + V ?III.Technique : Eliciting , using picture , pairwork , groupwork .


329


IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , sub- board .V.Procedure :

T’s Activities Ss’Activities 1.Warm up :

- Greetings.-

Have Ss play a game : Slap the board .

- Teacher reads in Vietnamese , Ss slap in English.

- State the group which wins the game .

- Remark and lead in new lesson .2.Presentation :

- Introduce the situation of the lesson .- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen

to the tape .- Explain some new words :+ Cowboy movie ( n ) + Detective movie ( n ) + Pop concert ( n ) + Classical concert ( n ) + Drama ( n ) + Advertisement ( n )


Each group has 3 students to take part in the game.

Clap the hands .

- Listen .- Look at the books and

listen to the tape .- Listen and write down .



330

Adventure

Concert

Movie

Theater

News

Series



- Correct their pronunciation .- Have Ss work in pairs reading the

dialogue .- Call on some pairs to practice in front

of the class .- Correct the pronunciation .- Explain the model sentences :What would you like to watch / see?I’d like to watch / see a cowboy movie .

3.Practice :- Ask Ss to look at the advertisements ,

make up similar dialogues .- Have Ss work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice in front

of the class .- Correct the mistakes if necessary .

4.Further practice :- Give a mapped dialogue :Hoa ………………….Lan

Would ……theater? ….good . What would you ………..?


- Practice reading in front of the class .


- Look at the advertisements and make up similar dialogues .


class.S1: Would you like to go to the concert this week ?S2: That sounds good . What would you like to see?S1: There is a classical concert on at Hanoi opera House.S2: Ok. Can you make it on Tuesday night ?S1: Sorry , I have to go to E club .S2: ………



331


….easy life …….youth theater . Ok …….Tuesday night?Sorry ….E club .How….Thursday? Ok .Fine, let’s ………

- Have Ss work in pairs using mapped dialogue .

- Call on some pairs to role play in front of the class .

- Correct the mistake.5. Homework :

- Learn by heart new words .- Make a dialogue in the notebook .- Prepare part A3 .


class .

- Write homework .

4.Supplement:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Period UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN Lesson 3 : A – Time for TV ( A3 ,4 )I. The aims :


332

Theater

News

Series


After the lesson , students will be able to understand about TV in Viet Nam thirty years ago and today . Practice reading skill .II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Owner - To change - To gather - Might 2. Grammar : Review the simple present tense and past simple tense .III. Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork , using pictures .IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , pictures , sub- board .V. Procedure :

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities 1. Warm up :- Greetings .- Have Ss play a game : Hangman 3 words : Watch – television – living room - Have Ss guess the words .- Remark and lead in new lesson .2. New activities :A. Read : TV in Viet Nam - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and say about them .- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words to Ss .+ Owner ( n ) : the person who has TV .+ To gather ( v ) : + To change ( v ) :+ Might ( modal verb ) :



- Look at the pictures and say about them .- Listen and write .

- Read new words in chorus and individually .


333


- Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually .- Correct their pronunciation .- Have Ss play a game : what and where .- Ask Ss to do an exercise : True or False prediction.1) Thirty years ago in Viet Nam , a lot of people had TV sets .2) These TV owners were very popular .3) The neighbors gathered to watch color programs in the evening .4) Now , they don’t spend much time together .5) A few people have TV sets today .- Have Ss do exercise in groups .- Call on some groups to give their predictions .- Ask the rest groups to exchange the results .- Have Ss look at the book , listen to the tape and check their predictions .- Call on some Ss to give the answers .- Correct and give the answer key :1. F 2. T 3. F 4. T 5 . F - Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud .- Give some answers and ask students to find out the questions .1) No, very few people .2) The black and white programs .3) They might sleep a little .4) No, noone .5) In their own living room .- Have students work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class .

- Play a game .

- Work in groups .- Give the predictions .- Exchange the result.


- Some students read the passage aloud .- Read the passage again and find the questions for the answers .

- Work in pairs .- Practice asking and answering in front of the


334


- Correct the mistakes and ask students to write down .* Now complete the summary :- Ask students to read the passage again then find the words to complete the summary .- Have students exchange the results with the partners .- Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class .- Correct the mistakes and give the answer key :1. people 2. not 3. TV 4. popular 5. evening 6. gather 7. they 8. today 9. have 10. life 11. know - Call on some students to read the summary aloud .B. Play with words .- Ask students to look at the picture and answer the question : what is she doing ?- Play the tape for students .- Ask students to look at the books and read after the tape .- Call on some students to read aloud .- Correct their pronunciation .3. Consolidation :- Have students work in groups discussing the advantanges and disadvantanges of TV .- Call on some groups to present their ideas .- Correct if necessary .4. Homework :- Learn by heart new words by making 2 sentences with them .

class .

- Read the passage again and complete the summary .- Exchange the result with the partner .- Give the answer in front of the class .

- Read the summary aloud .

- Look at the picture and answer the question .- Listen to the tape .- Look at the book and read after the tape .- Read aloud .

- Work in groups .

- Give the ideas in front of the class .

- Write homework .


335


- Do exercise 3,4 at page 89 in workbook .- Prepare part B1,2 .

Preparing date : Period UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN Lesson 4 : B – What’s on ? ( B1,2 )I. The aims : The students continue to practice the topic about TV , they talk about their favorite programs and the time of some programs on TV .II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Sports show - Children’s program - Early news - Weather forecast - The world today - A first ful of dollars’ 2. Grammar : What kinds of programs do you like ?III. Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , sub- board .V. Procedure :



336


1. Warm up :- Greetings .- Have students play a game : Jumbled words .+ RGMAPOR+ NEATERGE+ SUMIC+ VOMEI+ REHATTE+ ODARI- Call on 2 students to go to the board and write down .- Remark and give marks .2. New activities :A. Listen . Then practice with a partner .- Ask students to look at the picture and answer the question: What’s on TV ?- Introduce the situation of the dialogue , then ask students to guess what kinds of programs Nga/ Ba likes.- Call on some students to give their predictions .- Have students look at the book and listen to the tape and check their prediction .- Have students work in pairs reading the dialogue .- Call on 3or 4 pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class .- Correct their pronunciation .* Now answer :- Ask students to read the dialogue again to find out the answers for the questions .- Have students work in pairs .

- Greetings .- Play a game .+ Program + Teenager + Music + Movie + Theater + Radio- Go to the board and write .

- Look at the picture and answer the question .- Listen and guess .

- Give the prediction .- Look at the book , listen to the tape and check the prediction .- Work in pairs .- Practice in front of the class .

- Read the dialogue again to find the answers .- Work in pairs .- Practice asking and


337


- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers :a. No’ she doesn’t because there aren’t many good programs for teenagers .b. Ba likes to watch sports shows, cartoons and movies .c. Nga likes to watch programs about teenagers in other countries .d. Because they don’t play the kind of music she likes .e. She is going to listen to the radio and maybe read a book .- Ask students to write in the notebooks .B. Listen . write the times of the programs .- Have students look at 5 programs in part 2 .

- Ask them to predict the times of these programs .

- Call on some students to give their predictions .- Ask them to listen to the tape and check their prediction.- Play the tape again for students .- Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class .- Have students listen to the tape again and check the answers .- Correct and give the answer key :a. Children’s programs : 5:oob. Early News : 6:oo


- Write in the notebook .

- Look at the programs in the book .- Predict the time of the programs .- Give the prediction in front of the class .- Listen to the tape .

- Give the answers.

- Listen to the tape and check the answers .


338


c. Weather forecast : 6:10 d. The world Today : 6: 15e. Movie : “ A firstful of dollars” : 7:oo- Have students write the answers in the notebooks .3. Consolidation :- Give some cues then ask students to practice asking and answering :+ Morning News + Teenagers.+ The world of animals .+ Music programs .- Have students work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .- Correct the mistakes .4. Homework :- Learn by heart new words .- Do exercise 1,2 at page 90 in workbook .- Prepare part 3,4 .

- Write in the notebooks .

- Write .


- Write homework .

Period


339


UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN Lesson 5 : B- What’s on ? ( B3,4 )I. The aims : After the lesson , the students will understand about popular TV programs . They will continue to know some more vocabulary about TV programs .II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Audience - To contest - Artist - Contestant - To perform - Folk music - Imports - To include - Satellite - Cable TV 2. Grammar : Review : the simple present tense .III. Technique : Explanation , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork .IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , pictures , tape , cassete , sub- board .V. Procedure :

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up :- Greetings .- Have students play a game : Noughts and Crosses




340

Early News The world Weather today forecast

Cartoons Sports shows Movies


EX: What kind of programs do you like? I like to watch Early News .- Have students play in 2 groups .- State the group which wins the game.2. New activities :A. Listen and read . Then answer the questions .- Ask students to look at the three pictures and identify them .- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words :+ Audience : The person who watches the shows .+ Artist ( n ) : A famous singer .+ To perform ( v ) :+ To contest ( v ) = To compete + Contestant ( n ) = Competitor + Folk music ( n ) :+ Imports ( n ) = foreign series .+ To include ( v ) : - Have students read new words in chorus and individually .- Check new words by playing a game called rub out and remember .- Have students do an exercise : T or F prediction .1. Pop music , contests , imports are popular TV programs .2. Teenagers like to listen to classical

- Play game in 2 groups .

- Look at three pictures and identify them .- Listen and write .


- Play a game .

_ Do an exercise .


341


music .3. There are contests of knowledge .4. The contestants are students , workers , TV viewers .5. Imports are very expensive .- Have students work in groups in 2 minutes .- Call on some groups to give their predictions .- Ask students to look at the books , listen to the tape and check their predictions .- Call on some students to give the answers .- Correct and give the correct answers :1. T 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F - Have students read the passage aloud .- Correct their pronunciation .- Ask students to work in pairs asking and asnwering the questions in the books .- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .- Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers .a. Teenagers like to hear the latest pop music and see the shows of their favorite artists .b. They are students , workers or family members .c. Imports usually include police and hospitals .d. Students’ answer.B. Write. Complete the passage . Use the

- Work in groups .- give the prediction .Listen to the tape and check .

- Give the answers in front of the class

- Read the passage aloud .

- Work in pairs .

- Practice asking and answering in front of the class .

- Read the words in the box .



342

Name Pop music Contest Imports others

LanHoa


words in the box .- Ask students to look at the words in the box and read them aloud .- Explain some new words to students .+ To be possible : the same meaning with Can.+ Satellite ( n ) :+ Cable TV ( n ) :- Have students complete the passage , using the words in the box .- Ask students to exchange the results with the partners .- Call on some students to give the results in front of the class .- Correct and give the answer key :1. Around 2. Watch 3. Listen 4. Series 5. Show 6. Like 7. Station 8. Receive 9. Cities 10 . Possible - Ask 2 students to read the passage aloud .3. Consolidation :- Have students take a survey :

Ex: S1: Do you want to hear pop music ? S2: Yes, I do./ No, I don’t .Or : S1: What TV programs do you want to

- Complete the passage .

- Exchange the results with the partners .- Give the results in front of the class .

- Read the completed passage aloud .

- Take a survey .

- Listen .

- Work in groups .

- Write homework .


343


see? S2: I want to see the contests ._ Have students work in groups .( Each group has a secretary )4. Homework :- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each .- Do exercise 3,4 at page 91 in workbook .- Review for doing a test in the next lesson .

A WRITTEN TEST Time : 45 minutes I. The aims : The students apply their knowledge to do the test , and through the test the teacher can be able to know the knowledge of each student . From that will have the method to teach them well.

II. Matran

Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Tổng


344


KQ TL KQ TL KQ TL

I Vocabs &

Languge

focus

4

1,0

8

2,0

12

3,0

.Grammar 4

2,0

4

2,0

III.Reading 3

1,5

2

1,0

5

2,5

IV. Writing

2

1,0

3

1,5

5

2,5

Total 4

1,0

8

2,0

5 9

2,5 4,5

26

10

II. Test :A. Even Test .I. Choose the correct answers .1. I can’t go out for a walk now . I ………..my homework . A. Must do B. Must to do C. Must doing 2. My father is a …………football player . A. Skill B. Skillful C. Skillfully 3. Would you like to go to the movies to night ? A. Yes , I do B. Yes, I like C. I’d love to 4. ………………do you like ? A. What of programs B. What kinds of programs C. What of kinds programs 5. In 1960s , ……….. in Vietnam didn’t have a TV set . A. Most of people B. Most people C. Most of the people 6. I ought to finish my homework before I………..table tennis . A. Will play B. Play C. Am playing 7. Playing chess after dinner sounds …………..to me . A. Boring B. Bored C. Boringly 8. We’ ll take a walk instead ………riding a bicycle. A. Of B. For C. With


345


II. Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets . 1. I’d like ( tell ) ……………you something about myself . 2. Children should ( spend )……………only a small part of their freetime ( play ) ….. …………….video games . 3. She ( not like ) ……………..riding . She ( prefer )……………..walking . 4. Nam prefers ( take )……………part in sports to ( watch )………………them. 5. Lan usually ( watch )…………….TV in the evening .III. Read the dialogue between Ba and Nam , then answer the questions . Ba : Would you like to see a movie , Nam ? Nam : Yes , I’d love to . What would you like tosee ? Ba : There is an interesting movie on at the New Age theater . Nam : What movie is it ? Ba : It’s a detective movie . Nam : OK . Let’s go this evening then . Ba : I’m sorry I can’t . I have to finish my homework tonight . What about tomorrow evening ? Nam : Sorry . I’m going to visit my grandmother . How about Friday evening ? Ba : That’s OK . Let’s meet at half past seven in front of the theater . 1. What would Ba like to see ? ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 2. Will Ba and Nam go to the theater tonight ? …………………………………………………………………………………………. 3. What is Nam going to do tomorrow evening ?………………………………………………………………………………………… 4. Where will they meet ?…………………………………………………………………………………………IV. Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given . 1. Nam is a good table tennis player . => Nam plays ……………………………………………………………………….. 2. Why don’t we go to the amusement center ? => What about ………………………………………………………………………? 3. He likes playing soccer better than watching TV .


346


=> He prefers ………………………………………………………………………. 4. You should stay inside at recess . => I advise ………………………………………………………………………….V. Listen . Then check True or False in the boxes .

Statements T F1. Nga , Lan and Long didn’t go to their English class yesterday.2. Nga didn’t stay at home . She visited her grandmother .3. Lan ate out in a restaurant with her friends .4. Long watched TV and listened to music .

B. Odd Test :I. Choose the best answer : 1. You ought ……………..to the dentist . A. to go B. go C. going 2. This river is very …………….for the swimmers . A. danger B. dangerous C. dangerously 3. What would you like ……………..? A. see B. seeing C. to see 4. ……….is a fun , easy and inexpensive activity . A. a walking B. walking C. to walk 5. There are many good programs ………….teenagers . A. on B. for C. with 6. We can learn more about the undersea world ……….Jacques Couteau’s invention. A. thanks to B. thanking to C. with thanks to 7. John is a fast runner . He runs very ……………. A. fast B. fastly C. quick . 8. Which do you prefer , playing sports or watching TV ? A. I prefer playing sports and watching TV to doing other things . B. I prefer playing sports to watching TV .


347


C. I prefer playing sports because it can help me to stay healthy .II. Supply the correct forms of the verbs in bracbets . 1. When my father ( be ) …………young , He ( drink ) ……………..a lot of wine . 2. They ( perform ) ……………….” Romeo and Juliet” last Sunday . 3. She’ d like ( drink ) ………………a glass of cold water . 4. Many years ago, many people in Vietnam ( not have ) ………………….TV sets. 5. My younger brother prefers ( play ) …………….chess to ( watch) ..………….cartoons . 6. Mai ( not like )…………………..reading books . She likes listening to music . III. Read the dialogue between Ba and Nam , then answer the questions . Ba : Would you like to see a movie , Nam ? Nam : Yes , I’d love to . What would you like tosee ? Ba : There is an interesting movie on at the New Age theater . Nam : What movie is it ? Ba : It’s a detective movie . Nam : OK . Let’s go this evening then . Ba : I’m sorry I can’t . I have to finish my homework tonight . What about tomorrow evening ? Nam : Sorry . I’m going to visit my grandmother . How about Friday evening ? Ba : That’s OK . Let’s meet at half past seven in front of the theater . 1. Where is the movie on ? …………………………………………………………………………………. 2. Why doesn’t Ba go to the theater tonight ? …………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Is Nam going to see a play with his parents tomorrow evening ? ………………………………………………………………………………….. 4. When will they go to the theater ? ………………………………………………………………………………….IV. Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given . 1. How about going to the movies this week ? => Why …………………………………………………………………………. 2. My father drives very carefully .


348


=> My father is ………………………………………………………………… 3. Reading books is more boring than watching TV . => Watching TV is more……………………………………………………… 4. You advise you not to watch TV too late . => You should ………………………………………………………………. V. Listen . Then check True or False in the boxes .

Statements T F1. Nga , Lan and Long didn’t go to their English class yesterday.2. Nga didn’t stay at home . She visited her grandmother .3. Lan ate out in a restaurant with her friends .4. Long watched TV and listened to music .III. Key :EvenTest :I. Choose the best answer .1. A 2. B 3. C 4. B 5. B 6. B 7. A 8. A II . Supply the correct forms of the verbs .1. To tell 2. Spend - playing 3. doesn’t like – prefers 4. taking - watching 5. watches III. Answer the questions .1. He would like to see a movie .2. No, they won’t .3. He is going to visit his grandmother .4. They will meet in front of the theater .IV. Rewrite these sentences .1. Nam plays table tennis well .2. What about going to the amusement center ?3. He prefers playing soccer to watching TV .4. I advise you to stay inside at recess .V. Listen .1.T 2. F 3. T 4. F


349


Odd Test :I. Choose the best answer :1. A 2. B 3. C 4. B 5. B 6. A 7. A 8. BII. Supply the correct forms of the verbs .1. was - drank 2. performed 3. to drink 4. didn’t have 5. playing – watching 6. doesn’t like III. Answer the questions .1. It’s on at the New Age Theater .2. Because he has to finish his homework .3. No, he isn’t .4. They will go to the theater on Friday evening .IV. Rewrite these sentences .1.Why don’t we go to the movies this week?2. My father is a very careful driver .3. Watching TV is more interesting than reading books .4. You should not watch TV too late .V. Listen :1.T 2. F 3. T 4. FTape : Yesterday was Sunday . Nga , Lan and Long did not go to their English class . They did different things last night . Nga stayed at home . She watched TV and played chess with her grandmother . Lan visited her friendsand ate out in a restaurant with them . Long played video games and listened to pop music . IV. Remark and homework :Prepare unit 15 – A1 .

.....................................................................................................................................

....................................Period UNIT 15 : GOING OUT Lesson 1 : A – Video games ( A1 ) I. The aims :


350


After the lesson , the students will be able to give the advice and respond for not doing something such as : playing video games . They will talk about video games and disadvantages of playing video games .II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Video games - Arcade - Amusement center - Addictive 2. Grammar : Structure : Don’t spend too much of your time in the arcade . No, I won’t .III. Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork , IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , sub- board .V. Procedure :

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up :- Greetings .- Have Ss play a game : Networks .

- Have Ss play game in 2 groups .- Remark and lead in new lesson .2. New activities :- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then


2 groups take part in the game .Discuss in groups , then Ss go to the board and write down .

- Listen and answer the


351

Entertainments


ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the question : What can you see in the picture ?- Introduce some new words :+ Amusement center ( n ) : A place where we can go to play some games for relaxing .+ Video games ( n ) :+ Arcade ( n ) : + Addictive ( adj ) :- Have students read new words in chorus and individually .- Have students play a game : what and where .- Have students look at the dialogue and listen to the tape .- Ask students to read after the tape .- Have students work in pairs reading the dialogue.- Call on 3 or 4 pairs to practice reading in front of the class .- Correct their pronunciation .- Introduce the new model sentence :+ Don’t spend too much of your time in the arcade.=> No, I won’t .( Advise somebody not to do something .)- Ask students to make examples as model .- Ask students to read the dialogue again and find the answers for the questions in the book .- Have students work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of the class .

question .


- Read new words .

- Play a game .- Look at the book and listen to the tape .- Read after the tape .- Work in pairs .- Practice in front of the class .

- Listen .

- Make examples as model .- Find the answers for the questions

- Work in pairs .- Practice asking and answering in front of the class .- go to the board and write the


352


- Have some students go to the board and write the correct answers .- Ask students to write the answers in the notebooks .a. He’s going to the amusement center .b. He’s going to play video games .c. He goes to the amusement center about once a week .d. No, he doesn’t . e. He usually stays for about an hour .f. Because video games can be addictive .g. He will do his homework later .3. Consolidation :- Give a mapped dialogue and ask students to look at carefully . YOU YOUR FRIENDWhere ….going ? Amusement center

What …….do? video games

How often ? 2/ week

Don’t spend …. video games …Don’t forget ……homework .

- Have students work in pairs .- Call on 2 or 3 pairs to practice in front the class .- Correct the mistake if necessary .4. Homework :

answers .- Write in the notebooks .



- Write homework .


353


- Learn by heart new words and structure by making 2 sentences with each .- Do exercise 1, 2 in workbook .- Prepare part A2,3 .

.....................................................................................................................................

......................................Period UNIT 15 : GOING OUT Lesson 2 : A- Video games (A 2, 3) I. The aims : By the end of the lesson , students will be able to understand video games and some disadvantages of playing video games .II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Inventor - Social skill - Dizzy - Premises - To develop - Robbery - To identify - Industry 2. Grammar : - Modal verbs . - The present simple tense . III. Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .V. Procedure :



354


- Greetings .- Ask students some questions such as :+ Do you like playing video games ?+ How often do you play video games ?+ How long do you usually spend playing video games?+ What do you think about playing video games ?………………- Remark and lead in new lesson .2. New activities :A. Listen and read .- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then ask students to do an exercise : True or False prediction .1. Children like playing video games because they are good fun .2. It’ s very good for children to spend too much time on their own .3. Playing video games for a long time will make the children become tired .4. Children mustn’t play outdoors with their friends .5. Some inventors become rich when they are very young .- Have students work in groups .- Call on some groups to give their prediction.- Ask students to look at the books and listen to the tape then check their prediction .- Call on some students to give the answers .- Correct and give the correct answers :1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T - Have students listen to the tape again and


- Listen and do exercise .

- Work in groups .- Give the prediction .- Listen to the tape and check the prediction .- Give the answers .

- Listen to the tape again .


355


introduce some new words :+ Inventor ( n ) The person who invents videogames .+ Dizzy ( adj ) :+ To develop ( v ) :+ Social skill ( n ) :- Have students read new words in chorus and individually .- Ask students to read the text in silent .- call on 3or 4 students to read the text aloud .- Correct their pronunciation .* Now answer , complete the sentences .- Have students read the text again to find out the answers .- Have students exchange the results with the partners .- Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class .- Correct the mistake and give the correct answers .a) Many young people play video games .b) Some inventors of video games become very rich .c) The doctor thinks all children should take part in outdoor activities with their friends .d) The doctor says you should spend little time playing video games .- Have students write in the notebooks .B. Complete the passage with the words in the box .- Explain the request of the exercise then introduce some new words .

- Read new words in chorus and individually .- Read the passage in silent .- Read aloud .

- Read the passage again to find the answers .- Exchange the results with the partners .- Give the answers .

- Write down .


- Read new words in chorus and individually .- Complete the passage .- Exchange the results .


356


+ To identify ( v ) :+ Premises ( n ) :+ Robbery ( n ) => robber ( n ) + Industry ( n ) :- Have students read new words in chorus and individually .- Have students complete the passage .- Ask them to exchange the results with the partners .- Call on some Ss to give the answer in front of the class - Correct and give the key :1. be 2. have 3. is 4. identify 5. are 6. use 7. can 8. will 9. buy 10. show - Call on 2 students to read the completed passage aloud - Ask students to write down .3. Consolidation :- Have students work in groups discussing about the disadvantages of playing video games .- Call on some groups to demonstrate their ideas in front of the class .- Remark .4. Homework :- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each .- Do exercise 3,4 in workbook .- Prepare the next lesson .


- Read aloud .- Write .

- Work in groups .

- Demonstrate the ideas .

- Write homework .

...............................................................................................................

..............................................................Period


357


UNIT 15 : GOING OUTLesson 3: A – Video games

I. The aims : After the lesson , students will be able to give the advice with should and shouldn’t .II. Language content : Review modal verbs with should and shouldn’t .III. Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , sub- board .V. Procedure :

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up :- Greetings .- Have students play a games : Slap the board . + Play outdoors . + Take part in activities . + Play with friends . + Play video games . + Stay up late .- Have students play in 2 groups .- Remark and lead in new lesson .2.Presentation :


- Play in 2 groups .


358


- Have students read the text in part A2 again then find out the sentences using modal verbs .- Call on some students to give the sentences in front of the class .- Give the table of grids and ask them to complete .

3. Practice :- Ask students to use the grids to make sentences about what they should do and shouldn’t do .Ex : We should play outdoors . Yes , we should .- Have students work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .

- Correct the mistake .4. Production :- Have students play a game : Noghts and crosses

- Find the sentences using modal verbs .- Give the results .

- Complete the table .

- Make sentences .

- Work in pairs .- Practice in front of the class .S1: We shouldn’t play video games for a long time .S2: No, we shouldn’t .S1: We should take part in activities with friends .S2: Yes , we should .

- Play a game .



359

Activities in freetime Should Shouldn’t

+ Play outdoors .+ Play video games for a long time .+ Take part in activities with friends.+ Spend a little time playing video games.


- Ask students to make sentences with should and shouldn’t .Ex: We should play outdoors . We shouldn’t play video games too much.- Remark .5. Homework :- Write 5 sentences with should and shouldn’t .- Prepare part B1,2 .

- Make sentences with should and shouldn’t .

- Write homework .

UNIT 15 : GOING OUT Lesson 4 : B – In the city ( B1,2 ) I. The aims :


360

Play outdoors Spend much money Take part in on video games outdoorsactivities

Stay up too Play video games Be with people late too much with our age


After the lesson students will be able to know about life in the city and life in the country . Practice 4 skills : listening , reading , speaking and writing .II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - The rest - To scare - To hate - Awake - Get used to - Direction 2. Grammar : Review : the simple present tense and past tense .III. Technique : Brainstorming , Asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork .IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , Pictures about the city and the country .V. Procedure :

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up :- Greetings . - Have students play a game : Wordsquare .

- Ask students to find the words which relate to the city and country .- Have students work in groups .


Discuss in groups to find the words which relate to the city and the country .

- Work in groups .


361

H R O B H G I E NO C L U B Z W S CO Z K S J V Q I ED R S Y M N T O G M Z J R K Y T


-Remark and lead in new lesson .2. New activities :- Ask students to look at the picture and answer the question : What is the picture about ?- Ask students some questions such as :+ Do you like to live in the city or in the country ? Why / why not ?- Introduce the situation of the lesson .- Ask students to look at the book and listen to the tape , then answer the question : Lan and Hoa , who likes to live in the city or in the country .- Play the tape for students .- Have students give the answers .- Introduce some new words to students :+ The rest ( n ) :+ Awake ( adj ) :+ To scare ( v ) :+ To hate ( v ) = to dislike + To get used to + N .+ Direction ( n ) :- Have students read new words in chorus and individually .- Have students play a game : rub out and remember .- Have students discuss about life in the city and life in the country .* Brainstorming :Life in the city Life in the country Crowded Little traffic………… …………..- Have students work in groups .- Call on some groups to give their ideas .

- Look at the picture and answer the question .- Answer T’s questions .

- Listen .- Look at the book and listen to the tape then answer the questions .

- Give the answers .- Listen and write .

- Read new words in chorus and individually .- Play a game .- Discuss about life in the city and life in the country .

- Work in groups .- Give the ideas .- Work in pairs reading the


362


- Have students read the dialogue in pairs .- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class .- Correct the pronunciation .- Ask students to read the dialogue again and find the answers for the questions .- Have students play a game : Lucky numbers 1. Where did Hoa live before ?2. Why doesn’t Hoa like the city ?3. LN .4. What does Hoa do in the evening ?5. What does Hoa dislike most in the city ? Why ?6. Does She like the city ?7. LN 8 . Why did Hoa like living in a village in Hue?- Remark and ask students to write the answers in the notebooks .3. Consolidation :- Ask students to use the questions in part B2 to work in pairs discussing about life in the city and life in the country .- Have students work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .- Correct and remark.4. Homework :- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each - Write the answers in part B2 in the exercise books .- Prepare part B3,4 .

dialogue .- Practice reading the dialogue in front of the class .- Find the answers .



- Discuss about life in the city and in the country .


- Write homework .


363


UNIT 15 : GOING OUTLesson 5 : B – In the city ( B 4 )

I. The aims : After the lesson students will know how Hoa got used to the life in the city and what she could do . They practice reading and listening skills .II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Rarely - To socialize 2. Grammar : - Review : The simple present tense and past simple tense . - Like / Prefer + to infinitive ; Like + gerund III. Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork , using pictures .IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .V. Procedure :

T’s Activities Ss’ Activities1. Warm up :- Greetings . - Greetings .


364 City

Country


- Have students play a game : Networks

- Have students work in groups .- Have students go to the board and write .- Remark .2. New activities :A. Read .- Introduce the content of the text : The text tells how Hoa got used to the city life .- Ask students to read the text and find out what she could do .- Have students read the text in silent .- Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class .- Call on some students to read the text aloud .- Correct the pronunciation .- Introduce new words :+ Rarely ( adv ) :+ To socialize ( v ) : + Structure : Like / prefer + to infinitive Ex: Hoa likes to read / She prefers to socialize with her friends .Like / prefer + gerund .Ex: Hoa like playing chess very much .- Ask students to make sentences as model .- Give some more questions and ask students to answer :

- Play a game .

- Work in groups .- Go to the board and write .

- Listen .

- Read the text and find out what she could do .- Read in silent .- Give the answers in front of the class .- Read the text aloud .


- Make sentences .- Answer the questions .


365


a) What did Hoa and her friends often do together ?b) Why did Hoa rarely go to see movies or eat out in the evening ?c) Why couldn’t Hoa read many books in her village ?d) Why did Hoa decide that the city wasn’t so bad after all ?- Have students work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class .- Correct the mistakes .- Ask students to read the text again then make a list of the things Hoa does in the evening , using the simple present tense .- Have students exchange the results with their partners .- Call on some students to give their answers in front of the class .- Call one student to go to the board and write down .- Correct and ask students to write in the notebooks .B. Listen . Match each name to an activity .- Introduce the aim of the listening .- Ask students to look at the pictures and give the activity of each picture .- Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class .- Have students guess and write the names next to the pictures .- Ask students to listen to the tape and check their

- Work in pairs .- Ask and answer in front of the class .

- Make a list of the things Hoa does in the evening .

- Exchange the results .

- Give the answers in front of the class .- Go to the board and write .- Write in the notebooks .

- Listen to the teacher .- Give the activity of each picture .

- Guess and write the names next to the pictures .- Listen to the tape and check the prediction .- Listen.- Give the answers in front of the class .


366


prediction .- Play the tape for students .- Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class .- Play the tape again for students to check the answers - Correct and give the key :Ba- b Hoa- a Nga – d Nam – c Lan – f An – e 3. Consolidation :- Ask students to use the model in part B3 and the pictures in B4 to talk about what they like to do or dis like to do .- Have students work in pairs .- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .- Remark .4. Homework :- Write the things that you often do in the evening .- Do exercises in part B in workbook .- Prepare unit 15 –B4,5.

- Check the answers .

-


- Write homework .


367

Week 15 : - Tải miễn phí tài liệu, ebook, văn bản mẫu, mẫu...

Documents

Transcript of Week 15 : - Tải miễn phí tài liệu, ebook, văn bản mẫu, mẫu...